WO2012077469A1 - Resin film and manufacturing method therefor - Google Patents

Resin film and manufacturing method therefor Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2012077469A1
WO2012077469A1 PCT/JP2011/076319 JP2011076319W WO2012077469A1 WO 2012077469 A1 WO2012077469 A1 WO 2012077469A1 JP 2011076319 W JP2011076319 W JP 2011076319W WO 2012077469 A1 WO2012077469 A1 WO 2012077469A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
polymer
mass
layer
resin film
group
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2011/076319
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
畠山 晶
和史 古川
ゆきえ 渡邊
一路 尼崎
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Publication of WO2012077469A1 publication Critical patent/WO2012077469A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L31/00Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
    • H01L31/04Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof adapted as photovoltaic [PV] conversion devices
    • H01L31/042PV modules or arrays of single PV cells
    • H01L31/048Encapsulation of modules
    • H01L31/049Protective back sheets
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02EREDUCTION OF GREENHOUSE GAS [GHG] EMISSIONS, RELATED TO ENERGY GENERATION, TRANSMISSION OR DISTRIBUTION
    • Y02E10/00Energy generation through renewable energy sources
    • Y02E10/50Photovoltaic [PV] energy

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a resin film and a manufacturing method thereof.
  • inorganic and organic ultraviolet absorbers are known.
  • organic ultraviolet absorbers have a higher degree of design freedom in compound structure than inorganic ultraviolet absorbers, and therefore, various absorption wavelengths can be obtained by devising the molecular structure.
  • various organic ultraviolet absorbers have been proposed, and as one example, a triazole ultraviolet absorber has been disclosed (for example, see JP-T-2002-524452).
  • a triazole ultraviolet absorber has been disclosed (for example, see JP-T-2002-524452).
  • trisaryl-s-triazine having an alkoxy group and a hydroxy group at specific positions see, for example, Japanese Patent No. 3965631).
  • those having a maximum absorption wavelength in the long wave ultraviolet region tend to have poor light resistance, and the ultraviolet shielding effect decreases with time. For this reason, in a usage form that is left for a long time under ultraviolet light exposure, the shielding effect cannot be maintained, so that the long-term durability cannot be greatly improved.
  • a solar cell module is generally a transparent glass substrate disposed on the side on which sunlight is directly incident, and a so-called back sheet for protecting the back surface disposed on the side opposite to the side on which sunlight is incident (back side). Between the two solar cells. The space between the glass and the solar battery cell and the space between the solar battery cell and the back sheet are generally sealed with a sealing agent such as EVA (ethylene-vinyl acetate) resin.
  • EVA ethylene-vinyl acetate
  • the back sheet has a function of preventing moisture from entering from the back surface of the solar cell module, and polyester is used from the viewpoint of cost and the like.
  • a backsheet using polyester for example, a sheet having a polyester support provided with a light-reflective colored layer or a layer that easily adheres to a sealing material is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-2007). 118267).
  • UV-A long wave ultraviolet
  • UV absorbers are generally used by mixing with resin, etc.
  • the thickness is limited to about several tens of ⁇ m.
  • an ultraviolet absorber In order to impart ultraviolet absorbing ability in the long wavelength region, an ultraviolet absorber must be contained at a high concentration. However, if it is simply contained in a high concentration, there is a problem that the ultraviolet absorber is liable to precipitate, causes bleed out during long-term use, and deteriorates odor.
  • benzophenone-based and benzotriazole-based UV absorbers known in the past often have low solubility, so there is a problem that it is actually difficult to form a coating film well by the conventional coating method. .
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above, a method for producing a resin film that forms a coating film having a good coating surface shape and excellent adhesion between adjacent organic materials, and a long-wave ultraviolet light around 400 nm.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a resin film that has an ultraviolet shielding effect in a wide wavelength region including the (UV-A) region, exhibits excellent light resistance, and has a good surface shape and excellent adhesion of the coating layer. The goal is to achieve this.
  • R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d , and R 1e each independently represent a monovalent substituent other than a hydroxy group, and at least one of R 1a to R 1e Represents a substituent having a Hammett's rule ⁇ p value of 0.3 or more.
  • the substituents represented by R 1a to R 1e may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n , and R 1p each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and the substituents are bonded to each other A ring may be formed.
  • R 1a , R 1c , and R 1e in the general formula (1) represent a hydrogen atom, and at least one of R 1b and R 1d is an alkoxycarbonyl group (COOR n [R n : alkyl group]), ⁇ 1> which is a nitro group (NO 2 ), a cyano group (CN), a fluoroalkyl group (R f ), a sulfonic acid or an alkali metal salt thereof (SO 3 H or SO 3 M [M: alkali metal]) It is a manufacturing method of the resin film of description.
  • the concentration of the compound represented by the general formula (1) in the coating liquid is 3% by mass to 9% by mass with respect to the total mass of the coating liquid, and the coating liquid of the binder polymer It is a manufacturing method of the resin film as described in said ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2> whose density in the inside is 6 mass% or more and 25 mass% or less with respect to the total mass of a coating liquid.
  • the method includes a step of preparing a dispersion by dispersing the compound represented by the general formula (1) in a solvent, In the polymer layer forming step, any one of the above ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein the coating liquid containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) in a dispersed state is applied using the dispersion liquid. It is a manufacturing method of the resin film as described in one.
  • ⁇ 5> The method for producing a resin film according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein a polymer selected from a fluorine-based polymer and a silicone-based polymer is contained as at least one of the binder polymers.
  • ⁇ 6> The method for producing a resin film according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein the coating liquid further contains a crosslinking agent that crosslinks the binder.
  • ⁇ 7> It is a manufacturing method of the resin film as described in said ⁇ 6> whose said crosslinking agent is a carbodiimide type crosslinking agent and / or an oxazoline type crosslinking agent.
  • ⁇ 8> The resin film according to ⁇ 6> or ⁇ 7>, wherein the content of the crosslinking agent in the polymer layer is 0.5% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less with respect to the binder polymer. It is a manufacturing method.
  • ⁇ 9> The method for producing a resin film according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8>, wherein the coating liquid further contains a solvent, and 50% by mass or more of the solvent is water.
  • the support is a polyester base material.
  • ⁇ 12> In any one of the above items ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 11>, including a protective layer forming step of forming a protective layer by applying a coating solution for a protective layer containing at least the binder polymer on the polymer layer It is a manufacturing method of the resin film of description.
  • ⁇ 13> Any one of the above ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 12>, which is used as a solar cell backsheet provided on a side opposite to a side on which solar light is incident on a battery side substrate in which a solar cell element is sealed with a sealing material It is a manufacturing method of the resin film as described in any one.
  • the manufacturing method of the resin film which forms the coating film excellent in the adhesiveness between the organic materials with favorable coating surface shape and adjacent can be provided.
  • a film can be provided.
  • the method for producing a resin film of the present invention comprises a step of forming a polymer layer by applying a coating liquid containing at least a compound represented by the general formula (1) shown below and a binder polymer on a support (hereinafter referred to as a polymer layer). It may also be referred to as a “polymer layer forming step.”), And if necessary, further provided with other steps such as a drying step for heating and drying the coated film after coating. May be.
  • the triazole-based compound has low solubility and has been conventionally considered to be difficult to apply uniformly.
  • a compound having a specific structure as an ultraviolet absorber hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as UV agent
  • UV agent an ultraviolet absorber
  • Using the compound in a support instead of kneading it into the support, it is formed by coating a mixed solution containing the compound together with a binder polymer, so that a good coated surface can be obtained and the coating amount is small (thin film). Since the UV agent is unevenly distributed in the vicinity of the support surface, excellent light resistance is maintained over a long period of time. In particular, the ultraviolet shielding effect is excellent in a wide range including a long wave ultraviolet (UV-A) region around 400 nm. Moreover, since the coating amount of the compound having a specific structure can be reduced, it is possible to form a coating film having excellent adhesion with an adjacent organic material (a support when applied to the support surface).
  • UV-A long wave ultraviolet
  • the polymer layer in the present invention is not particularly limited and may be any layer provided on the support depending on the application.
  • the resin film of the present invention is applied to the use of a solar cell and used as a so-called back sheet for protecting the back surface disposed on the side opposite to the side on which sunlight directly enters (back side)
  • Easy adhesion to improve the adhesion of the polymer layer to (1) a colored layer containing a colorant such as a pigment and a battery-side substrate (especially a sealing material such as EVA for sealing the solar cell element) provided with the solar cell element.
  • a back surface protective layer provided on the side not facing the battery side substrate.
  • the colored layer includes, for example, a white pigment, a reflective layer that reflects light that has passed through the solar cells and reaches the back sheet and returns to the solar cells, and a design layer that enhances the decorativeness of the appearance. It is.
  • a coating solution is applied on a support to form a polymer layer.
  • a coating solution is applied on a support to form a polymer layer.
  • the dry thickness of the polymer layer is preferably 0.5 to 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the polymer layer is 0.5 ⁇ m or more, it exhibits a higher ultraviolet shielding effect with a thinner film, exhibits higher durability performance, and has good adhesion to the polymer support.
  • the thickness of the polymer layer is 10.0 ⁇ m or less, the surface shape becomes better, and the adhesive strength between the adjacent layer and the polymer substrate is excellent. That is, when the thickness of the polymer layer is in the range of 0.5 to 4.0 ⁇ m, the durability and planarity of the polymer layer are compatible, and the adhesion between the polymer substrate and the polymer layer is superior.
  • the thickness of the polymer layer is particularly preferably in the range of 1.0 to 5.0 ⁇ m.
  • the polymer layer may be provided as a single layer or may be provided with two or more layers.
  • the coating solution is a compound represented by the following general formula (1), a binder polymer, a solvent, and a dispersant, a surfactant, a crosslinking agent, a pigment, or a compound represented by the general formula (1) as necessary. And other components such as various additives such as UV absorbers.
  • the coating liquid in the present invention preferably contains at least the compound represented by the general formula (1) in a dispersed state dispersed in the liquid.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) may be used after being dissolved in a solvent that dissolves the compound. However, it is preferable that the compound is dispersed in a solvent and is present as dispersed particles in the coating solution.
  • the layer is formed when the polymer layer is exposed to a moist heat environment or the like compared to the case where it is dissolved and contained. The phenomenon of exuding from the inside can be prevented.
  • the method for producing a resin film of the present invention preferably includes a dispersion step of preparing a dispersion by dispersing the compound represented by the general formula (1) in a solvent.
  • the dispersion prepared in the dispersing step, the binder polymer, and other components such as a surfactant and a crosslinking agent as necessary are mixed to form a coating solution for forming the polymer layer.
  • a polymer layer is suitably formed by preparing and apply
  • the dispersed state means a state (emulsion) in which a solution of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is dispersed in a water-insoluble phase (oil phase) in an aqueous medium (aqueous phase), and an aqueous solution. It includes both a dispersed state (suspension) in which a water-insoluble compound is dispersed in a medium in a solid state or a liquid state. By being contained in a dispersed state, it can be retained in the layer after forming the polymer layer, and the occurrence of bleed out is prevented.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) is added to a solvent and stirred to prepare an oil phase in which the compound is dissolved.
  • the water-soluble resin include polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), methyl cellulose, and hydroxypropyl cellulose.
  • the organic solvent include tetrahydrofuran, ethyl acetate, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, and the like.
  • the presence of the compound represented by the general formula (1) in a dispersed state means that after preparing an emulsion (emulsion) or suspension shown below, after removing an organic solvent from the emulsion or suspension, A state in which the dispersion state can be visually confirmed to exist stably at 25 ° C. for at least one week. Specifically, it can be confirmed by measuring and comparing the average particle diameter of the dispersed particles immediately after the preparation of the emulsion and after at least one week has passed at 25 ° C.
  • the emulsion is prepared by adding 20 g of the compound represented by the general formula (1) to 100 g of an organic solvent (for example, tetrahydrofuran) and heating and stirring to prepare an oil phase in which the compound is dissolved.
  • an organic solvent for example, tetrahydrofuran
  • the average particle diameter is a value obtained as a median diameter by a laser analysis / scattering particle size distribution measuring apparatus LA950 (manufactured by Horiba, Ltd.).
  • the coating liquid in the present invention is preferably an emulsion (or suspension) in which the compound represented by the general formula (1) is dispersed and contained, a binder polymer, and other surfactants and crosslinkers as necessary. It can be prepared by mixing the ingredients.
  • a disperser for dispersing the compound represented by the general formula (1) a known stirrer or the like can be used.
  • a disperser, a bead mill, a ball mill, an ultrasonic disperser or the like is preferably used. Can do.
  • the coating solution may be an aqueous system using water as a coating solvent or a solvent system using an organic solvent such as toluene or methyl ethyl ketone.
  • a mixed solvent of water and an organic solvent miscible with water is used.
  • the form which used water as the solvent for the said coating liquid from a viewpoint of environmental impact is preferable, and the form whose 50 mass% or more is water with respect to all the solvents contained in a coating liquid is more preferable.
  • the proportion of water in the total solvent is preferably 60% by mass or more, and more preferably 80% by mass or more.
  • a coating solvent may be used individually by 1 type, and may mix and use 2 or more types.
  • a conventionally known coating method can be appropriately selected.
  • a known coating method such as a gravure coater or a bar coater can be used.
  • the coating solution for forming a polymer layer in the present invention contains at least one compound represented by the following general formula (1) as an ultraviolet absorber.
  • This ultraviolet absorber absorbs longer-wave ultraviolet rays than conventional ultraviolet absorbers, and provides an ultraviolet shielding effect in a wide range including a long-wave ultraviolet (UV-A) region around 400 nm. Thereby, in the long-term use, superior light resistance performance can be maintained as compared with the conventional case.
  • UV-A long-wave ultraviolet
  • the content concentration of the ultraviolet absorber represented by the general formula (1) in the coating liquid for forming the polymer layer is preferably 3% by mass or more and 9% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the coating liquid. 5 mass% or more and 8.5 mass% or less are more preferable.
  • the content concentration is 3% by mass or more, a good coated surface shape is obtained, and excellent light resistance is maintained over a long period of time. In particular, in a wide range including a long wave ultraviolet (UV-A) region around 400 nm. Excellent ultraviolet shielding effect.
  • UV-A long wave ultraviolet
  • Excellent ultraviolet shielding effect when the content concentration is 10% by mass or less, a good coated surface shape can be obtained, and excellent light resistance can be maintained over a long period of time, and the occurrence of bleed out when a polymer layer is formed can be prevented. it can.
  • R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d , and R 1e each independently represent a monovalent substituent other than a hydroxy group (OH group).
  • the substituents represented by R 1a to R 1e may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • At least one of the substituents represented by R 1a to R 1e is a group having a Hammett's Hammett's Hammett's substituent constant ⁇ p value of 0.3 or more.
  • the substituent represented by R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d , and R 1e is not particularly limited as long as at least one of R 1a to R 1e has a Hammett's ⁇ p value of 0.3 or more.
  • Preferred examples of the substituent having a Hammett's rule ⁇ p value of 0.3 or more include an alkoxycarbonyl group (COOR n ), a nitro group (NO 2 ), a cyano group (CN), a halogenated alkyl group (fluoroalkyl group (Rf)). ), Sulfonic acid or an alkali metal salt thereof (SO 3 H or SO 3 M).
  • R n represents an alkyl moiety.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl moiety represented by R n of the alkoxycarbonyl group is preferably in the range of 1-20.
  • the alkyl moiety may be linear or branched, and may further contain a double bond or a triple bond. Among these, the carbon number of the alkyl moiety is more preferably in the range of 1 to 10, and further preferably in the range of 1 to 5.
  • Specific examples of the alkoxycarbonyl group include methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, n-butoxycarbonyl group, t-butoxycarbonyl group and the like.
  • the halogenated alkyl group is not particularly limited in the number of halogen substitutions, and may be arbitrarily selected.
  • the kind of halogen is preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom, among which a fluorine atom is particularly preferred.
  • a fluoroalkyl group is preferable, a fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.
  • the fluoroalkyl group may be either a straight chain or a branched chain, and may further contain a double bond or a triple bond. Specific examples of the fluoroalkyl group include a fluoromethyl group, a difluoroethyl group, a perfluoromethyl group, and a hexafluoropropyl group.
  • M in the SO 3 M represents an alkali metal.
  • an alkali metal represented by M lithium, sodium, or potassium is mentioned suitably, Especially sodium or potassium is more preferable.
  • the substituent represented by R 1a to R 1e in the general formula (1) represents a monovalent group other than the above-described groups
  • the monovalent substituent (hereinafter referred to as “substituent A”).
  • the substituent A includes, for example, the following groups. That is, Specific examples of the substituent A include a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (including a halogenated alkyl group.
  • methyl, ethyl, perfluoromethyl Fluoroethyl aryl groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms (eg phenyl, naphthyl), cyano groups, carboxyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups (eg methoxycarbonyl), aryloxycarbonyl groups (eg phenoxycarbonyl), carbamoyl groups (eg carbamoyl) , N-phenylcarbamoyl, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl), alkylcarbonyl group (eg acetyl), arylcarbonyl group (eg benzoyl), nitro group, amino group (eg amino, dimethylamino, anilino, substituted sulfoamino group), acyl Amino group (e.g.
  • acetamido, ethoxycarbonylamino a sulfonamido group (e.g., methanesulfonamido), an imido group (e.g. succinimido, phthalimido), an imino group (e.g., benzylideneamino), a hydroxy group (R 1a, R 1b, R 1c, Not included in the monovalent substituent represented by R 1d and R 1e ), an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (for example, methoxy), an aryloxy group (for example, phenoxy), an acyloxy group (for example, acetoxy), Alkylsulfonyloxy group (for example, methanesulfonyloxy), arylsulfonyloxy group (for example, benzenesulfonyloxy), sulfo group, sulfamoyl group (for example, sulfamoyl
  • the monovalent substituent may be unsubstituted, may be further substituted with a substituent, and when having a plurality of substituents, the plurality of substituents may be the same or different. Examples of the substituent in the case of being substituted with a substituent include the groups listed as examples of the “monovalent substituent A”. Moreover, substituents may couple
  • Examples of the ring formed by bonding substituents include benzene ring, pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyrimidine ring, triazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrrole ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, oxazole ring, oxadi Examples thereof include an azole ring, a thiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a selenophene ring, a silole ring, a gelmol ring, and a phosphole ring.
  • a halogen atom a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (including a halogenated alkyl group), a cyano group, a carboxyl group, substituted or unsubstituted
  • alkoxy group a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoyl group, a thiocyanate group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl moiety having 1 carbon atom Preferred alkylsulfonyl groups of 20.
  • a hydroxy group (not included in the monovalent substituent represented by R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d , and R 1e ), an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and a carbon number of 6 are more preferably an aryloxy group having ⁇ 20, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and an amide group, and the monovalent substituent represented by a hydroxy group (R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d , R 1e is Not more preferred), an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms are more preferred.
  • the alkyl moiety of the alkoxy group is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, i-butyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, i -Pentyl, t-pentyl, n-hexyl, i-hexyl, t-hexyl, n-octyl, t-octyl, i-octyl can be mentioned, methyl or ethyl is preferred, and methyl is particularly preferred.
  • R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d and R 1e represents a monovalent substituent
  • at least one of the substituents represents a substituent having a positive Hammett's ⁇ p value.
  • R 1c represents a substituent having a positive Hammett's ⁇ p value
  • R 1a , R 1b , R 1d , and R 1e represent a hydrogen atom.
  • the “substituent in which the Hammett's ⁇ p value is positive” in R 1a , R 1c , and R 1e in the general formula (1) preferably has a ⁇ p value of 0.1 to 1.
  • 2 electron withdrawing groups As specific examples of the electron withdrawing group having a ⁇ p value of 0.1 or more, COOR r (R r represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably CONR s 2 (R s represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent), CN, halogen atom, NO 2 , SO 3 M (M represents a hydrogen atom or an alkali metal).
  • the “substituent having a positive Hammett's ⁇ p value” is more preferably COOR r , CONR s 2 , CN, CF 3 , a halogen atom, NO 2 , from the viewpoint of excellent light resistance and solubility. And SO 3 M.
  • R r and R s each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  • M represents a hydrogen atom or an alkali metal (the same applies to M hereinafter). ).
  • the “substituent having a positive Hammett's ⁇ p value” is more preferably COOR r or CN, and particularly preferably COOR r for the same reason as above.
  • R r and R s each represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and examples of the monovalent substituent herein include the substituent A.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • Examples of the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, i-butyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, and n-pentyl.
  • alkali metal represented by M include lithium, sodium, and potassium, and sodium and potassium are particularly preferable (hereinafter the same applies to M).
  • R 1c is any one of COOR r , CONR s 2 , CN, CF 3 , a halogen atom, NO 2 , SO 3 M, and further, COOR
  • the aspect which is r or CN is more preferable, and the aspect which is CN is still more preferable.
  • R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n , and R 1p each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, The substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p represent a monovalent substituent
  • R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p preferably represent the “substituent having a positive Hammett ⁇ p value”, and at least one of R 1g , R 1h , R 1i and R 1j It is more preferable that the ⁇ p value of the rule is positive (preferably 0.1 to 1.2) ”, and R 1h represents the“ substituent whose ⁇ p value of the Hammett rule is positive ”. More preferably, it represents.
  • R 1n and R 1h represent the above-mentioned “substituents whose Hammett's ⁇ p value is positive (preferably 0.1 to 1.2)” in view of excellent light resistance. preferable.
  • R 1h or R 1n is independently a hydrogen atom, COOR r , CONR s 2 , CN, CF 3 , halogen atom, NO 2 , SO 3 M, or the like, in that it exhibits excellent light resistance.
  • R 1h or R 1n is preferably a hydrogen atom
  • R 1h and R 1n are more preferably a hydrogen atom
  • R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p particularly preferably represent a hydrogen atom.
  • R 1c is “a substituent having a positive Hammett's ⁇ p value (preferably 0.1 to 1.2)” in that it exhibits excellent light resistance.
  • R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p are preferably hydrogen atoms
  • R 1c is COOR r , CONR s 2 , CN, CF 3 , More preferably, it is any one of a halogen atom, NO 2 , and SO 3 M
  • R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n, and R 1p are hydrogen atoms.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) preferably has a pKa in the range of ⁇ 5.0 to ⁇ 7.0, more preferably in the range of ⁇ 5.2 to ⁇ 6.5. More preferably, it is in the range of -5.4 to -6.0.
  • R 1a , R 1c and R 1e each represent a hydrogen atom
  • R 1b and R 1d each independently represent a monovalent substituent
  • R 1b and R 1d An embodiment in which at least one is a substituent having a positive Hammett's ⁇ p value can be given.
  • the compound represented by General formula (1) is excellent in solvent solubility. Compatibility with polymer (especially because of excellent compatibility with polyester, when a polyester resin composition containing the compound is used, precipitation or bleeding out of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is difficult to occur. It has the effect.
  • the solvent solubility means solubility in an organic solvent such as ethyl acetate, methyl ethyl ketone, and toluene.
  • compatibility with the polymer particularly compatibility with the polyester, it is preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, based on the solvent used.
  • the “substituent having a positive Hammett's ⁇ p value” in R 1b and R 1d in the general formula (1) is preferably COOR r , CONR s 2 , CN, CF 3. , A halogen atom, NO 2 , and SO 3 M.
  • R r and R s each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  • M represents a hydrogen atom or an alkali metal.
  • Examples of the monovalent substituent represented by R r and R s include the substituent A described above. Among these, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a nitro group, a cyano group, a fluoroalkyl group, and a sulfonic acid or an alkali metal salt thereof are preferable.
  • the "substituent ⁇ p value of Hammett's rule is positive” is a point showing the solubility and excellent light resistance, more preferably COOR r or a cyano group, it is preferably further is COOR r.
  • the “substituent having a positive Hammett's ⁇ p value” is a cyano group, it exhibits better light resistance, and when the “substituent having a positive Hammett's ⁇ p value” is COOR r , Better solvent solubility.
  • R r preferably represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms. . R r is more preferably a branched alkyl group having 5 to 15 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of solubility in a solvent.
  • the branched alkyl group has a secondary carbon atom or a tertiary carbon atom, preferably contains 1 to 5 secondary carbon atoms or tertiary carbon atoms, preferably contains 1 to 3, preferably 1 or It is preferable to include two, and it is more preferable to include one or two secondary carbon atoms and tertiary carbon atoms. Further, it preferably contains 1 to 3 asymmetric carbons.
  • R r is a branched alkyl group having 5 to 15 carbon atoms containing 1 or 2 secondary carbon atoms and tertiary carbon atoms and 1 or 2 asymmetric carbon atoms. It is particularly preferred. This is because the symmetry of the compound structure is lost and the solubility is improved.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, i-butyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, i -Pentyl, t-pentyl, n-hexyl, i-hexyl, t-hexyl, n-octyl, t-octyl, i-octyl can be mentioned, methyl or ethyl is preferred, and methyl is particularly preferred.
  • R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p represent a monovalent substituent in terms of exhibiting excellent light resistance
  • at least one of 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p represents the above-mentioned “substituent with a positive Hammett ⁇ p value”
  • R 1g More preferably, at least one of R 1h , R 1i and R 1j represents the “substituent whose Hammett's ⁇ p value is positive (preferably 0.1 to 1.2)”, and R 1h represents the “Hammett More preferably, it represents a “substituent whose ⁇ p value of the rule is positive”.
  • R 1b or R 1d and R 1h represent the above-mentioned “substituents whose Hammett's ⁇ p value is positive (preferably 0.1 to 1.2)”.
  • R 1h or R 1n is independently any one of a hydrogen atom, COOR r , CONR s 2 , a cyano group, CF 3 , a halogen atom, a nitro group, and SO 3 M in that excellent light resistance is exhibited.
  • R 1h or R 1n is preferably a hydrogen atom
  • R 1h and R 1n are more preferably a hydrogen atom
  • R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k R 1m , R 1n and R 1p particularly preferably represent a hydrogen atom.
  • R 1b , R 1c or R 1d is “a Hammett's ⁇ p value is positive (preferably 0.1 to 1.2). It is preferable that R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p are hydrogen atoms, and R 1b , R 1c or R 1d Is one of COOR r , CONR s 2 , cyano group, CF 3 , halogen atom, nitro group, or SO 3 M, and R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R More preferably, 1n and R 1p are hydrogen atoms.
  • R 1a , R 1b , R 1d , R 1e , R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n , and R 1p are hydrogen atoms
  • R 1c is COOR r [R r represents a monovalent substituent. ].
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) can take a tautomer depending on the structure and the environment in which the compound is placed, but the compound represented by the general formula (1) includes a tautomer. .
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) may contain an isotope (for example, 2 H, 3 H, 13 C, 15 N, 17 O, 18 O, etc.).
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) can be synthesized by any method.
  • known patent documents and non-patent documents for example, JP-A-7-188190, JP-A-11-315072, JP-A-2001-220385, “Dye and Drug”, Vol. 40, No. 12 (1995) ), Pages 325 to 339) and the like.
  • the exemplified compound (16) can be synthesized by reacting salicylamide, 3,5-bis (trifluoromethyl) benzoyl chloride and 2-hydroxybenzamidine hydrochloride.
  • it can be synthesized by reacting salicylamide, salicylic acid and 3,5-bis (trifluoromethyl) benzamidine hydrochloride.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) has a feature of excellent solubility in an organic solvent, and has a “substituent having a positive Hammett's ⁇ p value” at a specific position in the structural formula. Since LUMO is stabilized by the electron withdrawing group, the excitation life is shortened and the light resistance is excellent. Therefore, when used as a UV absorber, conventional UV absorbers such as triazine compounds, when used at a high concentration, have adverse effects such as precipitation, bleeding out due to long-term use, or yellowing due to decomposition.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) in the present invention has excellent solubility and light resistance, precipitation and bleed-out do not occur even when it is contained at a high concentration, and it takes a long time. Even when used, yellowing can be prevented without decomposition.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) may be used alone or in combination of two or more having different structures.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is not particularly limited, but is preferably 250 to 400 nm, and more preferably 280 to 380 nm.
  • the full width at half maximum is preferably 20 to 100 nm, more preferably 40 to 80 nm.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength and the full width at half maximum are values easily measured by a conventionally known method. The measurement method is described in, for example, “The Fourth Edition Experimental Chemistry Course 7 Spectroscopy II” (Maruzen, 1992), pages 180 to 186, edited by the Chemical Society of Japan. Specifically, the sample is dissolved in an appropriate solvent, and measurement is performed by a spectrophotometer using two cells for sample and control using a cell made of quartz or glass.
  • the solvent is required to have no absorption in the measurement wavelength region, have a small interaction with the solute molecule, and have a very low volatility in accordance with the solubility of the sample.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength and half width in the present invention are values measured by preparing a solution having a concentration of about 5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 mol ⁇ dm ⁇ 3 using ethyl acetate and using a quartz cell having an optical path length of 10 mm.
  • the half width of the spectrum is described in, for example, “Chapter 4 of Experimental Chemistry Lecture 3, Basic Operation III” (Maruzen, 1991), page 154, edited by the Chemical Society of Japan.
  • the half width may be explained with an example in which the horizontal axis is taken on the wave number scale, but the half width in the present invention uses a value obtained on the axis on the wavelength scale.
  • the unit of the half width is [nm]. Specifically, it represents the width of the absorption band that is half the absorbance at the maximum absorption wavelength, and is used as a value that represents the shape of the absorption spectrum.
  • a spectrum with a small half-value width shows a sharp spectrum
  • a spectrum with a large half-value width shows a broad spectrum.
  • UV-absorbing compounds that give a broad spectrum also have absorption in a wide range from the maximum absorption wavelength to the long wave side, so there is no yellowish coloration, and a spectrum with a small half-value width is effective for shielding the long wave ultraviolet region.
  • a UV-absorbing compound having is preferred.
  • the intensity of light absorption is proportional to the integral of the molar extinction coefficient, as described in Sumida Tokita “Chemical Seminar 9 Color Chemistry” (Maruzen, 1982), pages 154 to 155.
  • the oscillator strength is proportional to the product of the absorbance at the maximum absorption wavelength and the full width at half maximum (however, the full width at half maximum is a value centered on the wavelength scale). This means that when the transition moment values are the same, a compound having a spectrum with a small half width has a large absorbance at the maximum absorption wavelength.
  • Such UV-absorbing compounds have the advantage of being able to effectively shield the area around the maximum absorption wavelength with a small amount of use, but since the absorbance decreases sharply when the wavelength is slightly away from the maximum absorption wavelength, a wide range of areas can be used. It cannot be shielded.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) preferably has a molar extinction coefficient at the maximum absorption wavelength of 20000 or more, more preferably 30000 or more, and particularly preferably 50000 or more.
  • the molar extinction coefficient is 20000 or more, the absorption efficiency per mass of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is high, and therefore, it is represented by the “general formula (1) required to completely absorb the ultraviolet region.
  • the amount of “compound” can be reduced. This is preferable from the viewpoint of preventing skin irritation and accumulation in a living body and from the point that bleeding out hardly occurs.
  • the molar extinction coefficient is described in, for example, “New Edition Experimental Chemistry Course 9 Analytical Chemistry [II]” (Maruzen, 1977), page 244, edited by the Chemical Society of Japan. It can be obtained together.
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber represented by the general formula (1) in the formed polymer layer is preferably 0.15 to 5.0 g / m 2 , and preferably 0.3 to 4.0 g / m 2. More preferred.
  • the ultraviolet shielding effect is excellent in a wide range including a long-wave ultraviolet (UV-A) region near 400 nm.
  • production of bleed-out can be prevented because content is 5.0 g / m ⁇ 2 > or less.
  • the coating solution for forming a polymer layer in the present invention may contain two or more compounds represented by the general formula (1) having different structures as an ultraviolet absorber. Moreover, you may use together the compound represented by the said General formula (1), and 1 or more types of other ultraviolet absorbers other than that. When two types (preferably three types) of ultraviolet absorbers having different basic skeleton structures are used in combination, the dispersion state of the ultraviolet absorber is stabilized and ultraviolet rays in a wide wavelength region can be absorbed.
  • Examples of other ultraviolet absorbers other than the general formula (1) include triazine, benzotriazole, benzophenone, merocyanine, cyanine, dibenzoylmethane, cinnamic acid, cyanoacrylate, and benzoate. And the like.
  • Examples of the other ultraviolet absorbers include benzotriazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, salicylic acid compounds, benzoxazinone compounds, cyanoacrylate compounds, benzoxazole compounds, merocyanine compounds, and triazine compounds. More preferred are benzoxazinone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, triazine compounds and the like. Particularly preferred are benzoxazinone compounds.
  • Other ultraviolet absorbers are described in detail in paragraphs [0117] to [0121] of JP-A-2008-273950, and the materials described in the publication can be applied. When other ultraviolet absorbers are used in combination, the content ratio of the other ultraviolet absorbers is based on the amount of the ultraviolet absorber represented by the general formula (1) from the viewpoint of maintaining the effects of the present invention. 20 mass% or less is preferable.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably contained in combination with a benzoxazinone compound. Since the compound represented by the general formula (1) has excellent light resistance in the long wavelength region, it has the effect of preventing the deterioration of benzoxazinone that can be shielded to a longer wavelength region, together with the benzoxazinone-based compound. Use is preferable because the shielding effect can be sustained for a long time up to a longer wavelength region.
  • a high ultraviolet shielding effect can be obtained, and furthermore, a white pigment having a strong hiding power, such as titanium oxide, may be used in combination. Further, a slight amount (0.05% by mass or less) of a colorant may be used in combination depending on the viewpoint of appearance, color tone or preference.
  • a fluorescent brightener may be used in combination. Examples of the fluorescent brightening agent include commercially available products, general formula [1] described in JP-A-2002-53824, and specific compound examples 1 to 35.
  • the coating solution for forming a polymer layer in the present invention contains at least one binder polymer.
  • binder polymer examples include silicone polymers (for example, silicone-acrylic composite polymer, silicone-polyester composite polymer), polyester-based polymers (for example, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene-2,6-naphthalate (PEN)).
  • silicone polymers for example, silicone-acrylic composite polymer, silicone-polyester composite polymer
  • polyester-based polymers for example, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene-2,6-naphthalate (PEN)
  • polyurethane polymers eg, polymers comprising hexamethylene diisocyanate or toluene diisocyanate and ethylene glycol or propylene glycol
  • acrylic polymers eg, polymers containing polymethyl methacrylate, polyethyl acrylate, etc.
  • Appropriately selected from known polymers such as polyolefin polymers (for example, polymers composed of polyethylene and acrylic acid or methacrylic acid) It can be used Te.
  • adhesion between the support or other layers such as a colored layer and an undercoat layer, and weather resistance (particularly in a high humidity environment with temperature and humidity changes and heat and moisture (humidity))
  • weather resistance particularly in a high humidity environment with temperature and humidity changes and heat and moisture (humidity)
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) is incorporated to prevent deterioration of itself more effectively, and is resistant to weathering (particularly in a high humidity environment having changes in temperature and humidity, heat and moisture (humidity)).
  • a fluorine-based polymer and a silicone-based polymer are preferable, and a silicone-based polymer is particularly preferable.
  • X 1 , X 2 , and X 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, or a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • fluorine-based polymer examples include polytetrafluoroethylene (hereinafter sometimes referred to as PTFE), polyvinyl fluoride (hereinafter sometimes referred to as PVF), and polyvinylidene fluoride (hereinafter referred to as PVDF). ), Polychlorinated ethylene trifluoride (hereinafter sometimes referred to as PCTFE), polytetrafluoropropylene (hereinafter sometimes referred to as HFP), and the like.
  • PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
  • PVF polyvinyl fluoride
  • PVDF polyvinylidene fluoride
  • PCTFE Polychlorinated ethylene trifluoride
  • HFP polytetrafluoropropylene
  • the fluoropolymer may be a homopolymer obtained by homopolymerizing one kind of monomer, or may be obtained by copolymerizing two or more kinds of monomers.
  • a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing tetrafluoroethylene and tetrafluoropropylene abbreviated as P (TFE / HFP)
  • P tetrafluoroethylene and vinylidene fluoride
  • a polymer obtained by copolymerizing a fluorine-based monomer having a structural portion of-(CFX 1 -CX 2 X 3 )-and another monomer for example, a copolymer of tetrafluoroethylene and ethylene (abbreviated as P (TFE / E)), a copolymer of tetrafluoroethylene and propylene (abbreviated as P (TFE / P)), Copolymer of tetrafluoroethylene and vinyl ether (abbreviated as P (TFE / VE)), copolymer of tetrafluoroethylene and perfluorovinyl ether (abbreviated as P (TFE / FVE)), chlorotri Copolymers of fluoroethylene and vinyl ether (abbreviated as P (CTFE / VE)), copolymers of chlorotrifluoroethylene and perfluorovinyl ether (abbreviated as P (CTFE /
  • the fluoropolymer may be used by being dissolved in an organic solvent, or may be used by being dispersed in water as polymer particles. The latter is preferable in that the environmental load is small.
  • the aqueous dispersions of fluoropolymers are described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2003-231722, 2002-20409, and 9-194538.
  • silicone-based polymer examples include a composite polymer of silicone and acrylic, a composite polymer of silicone and polyester, and the like.
  • Commercially available products that are marketed may be used as the silicone polymer.
  • a composite polymer of silicone and acrylic Seranate WSA1060 and WSA1070 manufactured by DIC Corporation, Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corporation H7620, H7630, H7650, and the like.
  • the coating liquid for forming the polymer layer may be a combination of a fluorine-based polymer and / or a silicone-based polymer and a polymer other than these polymers.
  • a fluorine-based polymer and / or a silicone-based polymer and a polymer other than these polymers When other polymers are used in combination, it is preferable to use the polymers other than the fluorine-based polymer and the silicone-based polymer in the range of 50% by mass or less of the total mass of the binder. When the amount of the other polymer is 50% by mass or less, good weather resistance as a back sheet can be exhibited.
  • the concentration of the binder polymer in the coating solution for forming the polymer layer is preferably 6% by mass or more and 25% by mass or less, more preferably 8% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less, with respect to the total mass of the coating solution. It is. When the content of the binder polymer is 6% by mass or more, a layer having a good strength is obtained, and when the content is 25% by mass or less, the amount of the ultraviolet absorber is not relatively decreased. This is preferable for maintaining high light resistance.
  • the coating amount of the binder polymer in the formed polymer layer is preferably 1.0 to 8.5 g / m 2 , more preferably 2.0 to 6.0 g / m 2 or less.
  • the content of the polymer is 1.0 g / m 2
  • a layer having good strength can be obtained, and when it is 8.5 g / m 2 or less, the amount of the UV absorber may be relatively too small. In view of maintaining high light resistance, it is preferable.
  • the coating liquid for forming the polymer layer may contain a crosslinking agent for crosslinking the binder polymer contained in the polymer layer.
  • a crosslinking agent for crosslinking the binder polymer contained in the polymer layer.
  • the crosslinking agent include epoxy-based, isocyanate-based, melamine-based, carbodiimide-based, and oxazoline-based crosslinking agents.
  • a carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent and an oxazoline-based crosslinking agent are preferable from the viewpoint of securing adhesiveness after wet heat aging.
  • carbodiimide crosslinking agent examples include N, N′-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, N, N′-diisopropylcarbodiimide, 1-ethyl-3- (3-dimethylaminopropyl) carbodiimide hydrochloride, N- [3- ( And dimethylamino) propyl] -N′-ethylcarbodiimide, N- [3- (dimethylamino) propyl] -N′-propylcarbodiimide, N-tert-butyl-N′-ethylcarbodiimide, and the like.
  • commercially available products include Carbodilite V-02-L2 (manufactured by Nisshinbo Industries, Inc.).
  • oxazoline-based crosslinking agent examples include 2-vinyl-2-oxazoline, 2-vinyl-4-methyl-2-oxazoline, 2-vinyl-5-methyl-2-oxazoline, 2-isopropenyl-2- Oxazoline, 2-isopropenyl-4-methyl-2-oxazoline, 2-isopropenyl-5-ethyl-2-oxazoline, 2,2'-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2'-methylene-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2′-ethylene-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2′-trimethylene-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2′-tetramethylene-bis- (2-oxazoline) ), 2,2′-hexamethylene-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2′-octamethylene-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2′-ethylene-bis- (4,4 ′) Dimethyl-2-oxazoline), 2,2'-p-pheny
  • the content of the crosslinking agent in the polymer layer is preferably 0.5% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less, and still more preferably 5.0% by mass with respect to the binder.
  • the mass is 30% by mass or more.
  • the coating liquid used for forming the polymer layer in the present invention may contain a pigment, and the polymer layer may be formed as a colored layer.
  • the same pigment as in the colored layer described later can be used, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • a pigment having a desired hue may be included to give design properties, or a white pigment may be included to give the polymer layer a function as a reflective layer.
  • the coating liquid for forming the polymer layer may contain other additives such as a surfactant and a filler as necessary.
  • the surfactant examples include anionic and nonionic (for example, polyoxyalkylene having 2 or 3 carbon atoms and an alkyl group having 1 to 30, preferably 2 to 24, more preferably 6 to 24 carbon atoms).
  • Known surfactants such as alkylene alkyl ethers can be used.
  • the range of the content in the polymer layer is 0.1 mg / m 2 or more, and when the layer is formed, a good layer can be obtained while suppressing the occurrence of repelling. When it is m 2 or less, it is possible to maintain the adhesion between the polymer support and the second polymer layer satisfactorily.
  • the filler a known filler (inorganic fine particles) such as titanium dioxide can be used.
  • the content of the filler in the polymer layer is preferably 200% by mass or less, more preferably 150% by mass or less based on the amount of the binder in the polymer layer.
  • the lower limit of the filler content is preferably 0.5% by mass.
  • the filler content is 200% by mass or less, it is advantageous in that a good surface shape can be obtained.
  • the adhesiveness after wet heat aging is favorable in content of a filler being 0.5 mass% or more.
  • the content of the inorganic fine particles is more preferably in the range of 1% by mass to 15% by mass.
  • two or more polymer layers can be laminated. Specifically, after forming the first polymer layer containing the compound represented by the general formula (1), the binder polymer, and other components as necessary, as the first layer on the support, As the second layer on the first polymer layer, it further contains one or more binder polymers and optionally other components such as a surfactant and a crosslinking agent.
  • An embodiment having a second polymer layer (hereinafter also referred to as “protective polymer layer”) in which the content of the represented compound is 1.0% by mass or less with respect to the total amount of the binder polymer is also preferable.
  • the protective polymer layer preferably further has a total content of the compound represented by the general formula (1) and other ultraviolet absorbers of 1.0% by mass or less based on the total amount of the binder polymer.
  • a polymer layer containing a large amount of an ultraviolet absorber by having a laminated structure in which the polymer layer mainly containing an ultraviolet absorber (including a compound represented by the general formula (1)) is protected by a protective polymer layer.
  • the absorption of ultraviolet rays is more stable, and it is possible to suppress deterioration that appears as cracks or peeling of the support over a long period of time.
  • the protective polymer layer may contain an ultraviolet absorber (including the compound represented by the general formula (1)) to the extent that the effects of the present invention are not impaired, but the compound represented by the general formula (1). It is preferable that the content of the UV absorber, and hence the content of the UV absorber, is 1.0% by mass or less of the total binder mass, and the protective polymer layer does not substantially contain the UV absorber and does not contain the UV absorber (0 (Mass%) is more preferable.
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber of 1% by mass or less of the total binder mass means that the ultraviolet absorber is not actively contained, although the inclusion of the ultraviolet absorber is not excluded at all.
  • binder polymer contained in the protective polymer layer examples include known polymers such as a fluorine polymer, a silicone polymer, a polyester polymer, a polyurethane polymer, an acrylic polymer, and a polyolefin polymer. Can be used. Details and preferred embodiments of specific examples and the like of the polymer are as described in the polymer layer. Among these, from the viewpoint of further improving the durability performance when exposed to changes in temperature and humidity and high humidity and heat environment, it may contain one or more selected from the group consisting of fluorine-based polymers and silicone-based polymers. preferable.
  • the content of the binder polymer in the protective polymer layer is preferably 50% by mass to 95% by mass, and more preferably 60% by mass to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the protective polymer layer.
  • the content of the polymer is 50% by mass or more, good durability is obtained, and when it is 95% by mass or less, the amount of the crosslinking agent and the surfactant can be secured. Is advantageous.
  • the protective polymer layer further contains at least one crosslinking agent for crosslinking the binder polymer.
  • the crosslinking agent include epoxy-based, isocyanate-based, melamine-based, carbodiimide-based, and oxazoline-based crosslinking agents.
  • a carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent and an oxazoline-based crosslinking agent are preferable, and a carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent is more preferable from the viewpoint of securing adhesiveness after wet heat aging.
  • the details of the crosslinking agent, particularly the details and preferred embodiments of the carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent and the oxazoline-based crosslinking agent are as described in the polymer layer.
  • the content of the crosslinking agent in the protective polymer layer is preferably 0.5% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 0.5% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less with respect to the binder polymer constituting the layer.
  • the content of the crosslinking agent is 0.5% by mass or more, a sufficient crosslinking effect is obtained while maintaining the strength and adhesiveness of the polymer layer, and when it is 40% by mass or less, particularly 30% by mass or less, The pot life of the liquid when the coating liquid for forming the polymer layer is adjusted can be kept longer.
  • the protective polymer layer may further contain other additives such as a surfactant and a filler (inorganic fine particles) as necessary. These details are as described above.
  • the thickness of the protective polymer layer is preferably 0.5 to 12 ⁇ m. When the thickness of the protective polymer layer is 0.5 ⁇ m or more, higher durability can be obtained, and when it is 12 ⁇ m or less, the surface shape is good and the adhesiveness to the adjacent layer is excellent.
  • the thickness of the protective polymer layer is more preferably 1.0 to 10 ⁇ m.
  • the protective polymer layer can be formed by preparing a coating solution containing a binder polymer or the like, applying the coating solution on the first polymer layer, and drying the coating solution. After drying, it may be cured by heating.
  • a coating method for example, a gravure coater or a bar coater can be used.
  • the solvent used for the preparation of the coating solution can be selected from one or more of water and organic solvents such as toluene and methyl ethyl ketone.
  • the protective polymer layer is preferably formed by a method in which an aqueous coating solution in which a polymer is dispersed in water is prepared and applied. In this case, the proportion of water in the solvent is preferably 60% by mass or more, and more preferably 80% by mass or more.
  • the resin film of the present invention may have other layers such as a colored layer as necessary.
  • it can be configured as a solar cell backsheet in which a polymer layer is provided on one of the supports and a colored layer (particularly a light reflecting layer) is provided on the other.
  • a colored layer may be provided on one side of the support.
  • it can apply as a back sheet for solar cells as an example of the resin film of this invention.
  • a colored layer is provided on the light-receiving side of the support (the side facing the battery-side substrate provided with the solar cell element), and the back side is protected on the side opposite to the side provided with the colored layer.
  • a mode in which the above-described polymer layer in the present invention is provided as a layer is preferable.
  • the colored layer in the present invention contains at least a pigment and a binder, and may further include other components such as various additives as necessary.
  • the resin film of the present invention When the resin film of the present invention is used as a back sheet for solar cells, as a function of the colored layer, first, the light that has passed through the solar cells and reaches the back sheet without being used for power generation among the incident light. Increasing the power generation efficiency of the solar cell module by reflecting it back to the solar cell, and secondly, the decorativeness of the appearance when the solar cell module is viewed from the side where sunlight enters (front side) And so on. In general, when the solar cell module is viewed from the front side (glass substrate side), the back sheet is visible around the solar cell, and by providing a colored layer on the back sheet, the decorativeness of the back sheet itself is improved. The appearance can be improved.
  • the colored layer can contain at least one pigment.
  • the pigment include inorganic pigments such as titanium dioxide, barium sulfate, silicon oxide, aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, calcium carbonate, kaolin, talc, ultramarine blue, bitumen, and carbon black, and organic pigments such as phthalocyanine blue and phthalocyanine green. It can be appropriately selected and contained.
  • the colored layer is configured as a reflective layer that reflects light that has entered the solar cell and passed through the solar cell and returns it to the solar cell
  • white inorganic particles white pigments such as titanium dioxide, barium sulfate, silicon oxide, aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, calcium carbonate, kaolin and talc are preferable. Of these, titanium dioxide is preferable.
  • the content of the white inorganic particles in the reflective layer is preferably in the range of 30% by mass to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the binder polymer and the white inorganic particles, and more preferably white inorganic particles.
  • the range of the content of is 50 to 85% by mass.
  • the content of the pigment in the colored layer is preferably in the range of 2.5 to 12 g / m 2 , and more preferably in the range of 2.5 to 8.5 g / m 2 .
  • the pigment content is 2.5 g / m 2 or more, necessary coloring can be obtained, and reflectance and decorative properties can be effectively provided.
  • the content of the pigment in the colored layer is 12 g / m 2 or less, the planar shape of the colored layer is easily maintained and the film strength is excellent.
  • the reflective layer preferably contains white inorganic particles in the range of 4 to 12 g / m 2 .
  • the content of the white inorganic particles is 4 g / m 2 or more, the required reflectance is easily obtained, and when the content is 12 g / m 2 or less, the weight of the back sheet can be reduced.
  • a more preferable content of white inorganic particles in the reflective layer is in the range of 5 to 11 g / m 2 .
  • the reflective layer contains two or more types of white inorganic particles, the total content of all white inorganic particles in the reflective layer is preferably in the range of 4 to 12 g / m 2 .
  • the average particle diameter of the pigment is preferably 0.03 to 0.8 ⁇ m, more preferably about 0.15 to 0.5 ⁇ m in volume average particle diameter. When the average particle size is within the above range, the light reflection efficiency is high.
  • the volume average particle diameter is a value measured by a laser analysis / scattering particle size distribution measuring apparatus LA950 (manufactured by Horiba, Ltd.).
  • a polyester resin, a polyurethane resin, an acrylic resin, a polyolefin resin, a silicone resin, or the like can be used as the binder constituting the colored layer.
  • acrylic resin and polyolefin resin are preferable from the viewpoint of ensuring high adhesiveness.
  • Composite resins may be used, for example acrylic / silicone composite resins are also preferred binders.
  • the content of the binder component is preferably in the range of 15 to 200% by mass and more preferably in the range of 17 to 100% by mass with respect to the pigment. When the content of the binder is 15% by mass or more, the strength of the colored layer is sufficiently obtained, and when it is 200% by mass or less, the reflectance and the decorativeness can be kept good.
  • crosslinking agent examples include epoxy-based, isocyanate-based, melamine-based, carbodiimide-based, and oxazoline-based crosslinking agents. Details of the crosslinking agent, particularly details and preferred embodiments of the carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent and oxazoline-based crosslinking agent, are as described in the first polymer layer.
  • the addition amount of the crosslinking agent is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably 10 to 40% by mass, based on the binder in the layer.
  • surfactant known surfactants such as anionic and nonionic surfactants can be used.
  • the details and preferred embodiments of the surfactant are as described in the first polymer layer.
  • the content is preferably 0.1 to 15 mg / m 2 , more preferably 0.5 to 5 mg / m 2 .
  • filler known fillers such as colloidal silica and titanium dioxide can be used.
  • the content of the filler is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less per binder of the colored layer.
  • the colored layer can be formed by a method in which a polymer sheet containing a pigment is bonded to a support, a method in which a colored layer is co-extruded during substrate formation, a method by coating, or the like.
  • the colored layer can be formed by bonding, co-extrusion, coating or the like directly on the surface of the support or through an undercoat layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m or less.
  • the formed colored layer may be in a state of being in direct contact with the surface of the support or in a state of being laminated via an undercoat layer.
  • the method by coating is preferable because it is simple and can be formed in a thin film with uniformity.
  • the coating solution may be an aqueous system using water as an application solvent, or a solvent system using an organic solvent such as toluene or methyl ethyl ketone. Among these, from the viewpoint of environmental burden, it is preferable to use water as a solvent.
  • a coating solvent may be used individually by 1 type, and may mix and use 2 or more types. Specifically, for example, when a reflective layer is formed, white inorganic particles, a binder, and other components are included as necessary on the surface of the polymer support on which the first and second polymer layers are not formed. It can form by apply
  • an easy-adhesive layer that is easily adhesive to the organic component may be provided on one side of the support.
  • the resin film of the present invention may be, for example, a solar cell backsheet in which an easy-adhesion layer is provided (particularly on the colored layer).
  • the easy-adhesion layer is a layer for easily adhering firmly to the sealing material that seals the solar cell element of the battery side substrate (battery body) provided with the solar cell element.
  • the easy-adhesion layer can be formed using a binder and inorganic fine particles, and may further include other components such as additives as necessary.
  • the easy-adhesion layer is used for a sealing material (for example, ethylene-vinyl acetate (EVA; ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer), polyvinyl butyral (PVB), epoxy resin, etc.) that seals the power generation element of the battery side substrate.
  • EVA ethylene-vinyl acetate
  • PVB polyvinyl butyral
  • epoxy resin etc.
  • It is preferably configured to have an adhesive force of 10 N / cm or more (preferably 20 N / cm or more). When the adhesive force is 10 N / cm or more, it is easy to obtain wet heat resistance capable of maintaining adhesiveness.
  • the adhesive strength can be adjusted by a method of adjusting the amount of the binder and inorganic fine particles in the easy-adhesive layer, a method of applying a corona treatment to the surface of the back sheet that adheres to the sealing material, and the like.
  • the easy-adhesion layer can contain at least one binder.
  • the binder suitable for the easy-adhesive layer include polyester, polyurethane, acrylic resin, polyolefin, and the like. Among these, acrylic resin and polyolefin are preferable from the viewpoint of durability.
  • acrylic resin a composite resin of acrylic and silicone is also preferable.
  • binders examples include Chemipearl S-120 and S-75N (both manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals) as specific examples of polyolefins, and Jurimer ET-410 and SEK-301 (both Nippon Pure Chemical (both manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals, Inc.)).
  • Jurimer ET-410 and SEK-301 both Nippon Pure Chemical (both manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals, Inc.)
  • Ceranate WSA1060, WSA1070 both manufactured by DIC Corporation
  • H7620, H7630, H7650 both manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corporation
  • the content of the binder in the easy-adhesive layer is preferably in the range of 0.05 to 5 g / m 2 . In particular, the range of 0.08 to 3 g / m 2 is more preferable.
  • the content of the binder, 0.05 g / m 2 or more is desired as easy adhesion obtained to that, better surface state is obtained when the is 5 g / m 2 or less.
  • the easily adhesive layer can contain at least one kind of inorganic fine particles.
  • the inorganic fine particles include silica, calcium carbonate, magnesium oxide, magnesium carbonate, and tin oxide.
  • fine particles of tin oxide and silica are preferable in that the decrease in adhesiveness when exposed to a humid heat atmosphere is small.
  • the particle size of the inorganic fine particles is preferably about 10 to 700 nm, more preferably about 20 to 300 nm in terms of volume average particle size. When the particle size is within this range, better easy adhesion can be obtained.
  • the particle size is a value measured by a laser analysis / scattering particle size distribution measuring apparatus LA950 (manufactured by Horiba, Ltd.).
  • the shape of the inorganic fine particles is not particularly limited, and any shape such as a spherical shape, an irregular shape, or a needle shape can be used.
  • the content of the inorganic fine particles is preferably in the range of 5 to 400% by mass with respect to the binder in the easy-adhesive layer.
  • the content of the inorganic fine particles is preferably in the range of 50 to 300% by mass.
  • the easily adhesive layer can contain at least one crosslinking agent.
  • the crosslinking agent suitable for the easily adhesive layer include epoxy-based, isocyanate-based, melamine-based, carbodiimide-based, and oxazoline-based crosslinking agents.
  • an oxazoline-based cross-linking agent is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of ensuring adhesiveness after wet heat aging. Details of the crosslinking agent, particularly details and preferred embodiments of the carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent and oxazoline-based crosslinking agent, are as described in the first polymer layer.
  • Epocros K2010E, K2020E, K2030E, WS-500, WS-700 (all manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.), etc. can be used. It is.
  • the content of the crosslinking agent in the easy-adhesive layer is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably 20 to 40% by mass, based on the binder in the easy-adhesive layer.
  • the content of the crosslinking agent is 5% by mass or more, a good crosslinking effect can be obtained, and the strength and adhesiveness of the colored layer can be maintained.
  • the content is 50% by mass or less, the pot life of the coating liquid Can be kept long.
  • the easily adhesive layer may further contain a known matting agent such as polystyrene, polymethylmethacrylate, or silica, or a known surfactant such as anionic or nonionic.
  • a known matting agent such as polystyrene, polymethylmethacrylate, or silica
  • a known surfactant such as anionic or nonionic.
  • the formation of the easy-adhesion layer includes a method of bonding a polymer sheet having easy adhesion to a support or a method by coating. Especially, the method by application
  • a coating method for example, a known coating method such as a gravure coater or a bar coater can be used.
  • the coating solvent used for preparing the coating solution may be water or an organic solvent such as toluene or methyl ethyl ketone.
  • a coating solvent may be used individually by 1 type, and may mix and use 2 or more types.
  • the thickness of the easy-adhesion layer is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 0.05 to 8 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 to 5 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the easy-adhesion layer is 0.05 ⁇ m or more, necessary easy adhesion can be suitably obtained, and when it is 8 ⁇ m or less, the surface shape becomes better.
  • the easily adhesive layer of the present invention needs to be transparent so as not to reduce the effect of the colored layer.
  • the resin film of the present invention is configured by providing a support.
  • a support a conventionally known support substrate can be appropriately selected.
  • a polymer substrate is preferred.
  • the polymer base material include base materials using polyester, polyolefins such as polypropylene and polyethylene, or fluorine-based polymers such as polyvinyl fluoride.
  • a polyester base material is preferable from the viewpoint of cost and mechanical strength.
  • the polyester used as the support in the present invention is a linear saturated polyester synthesized from an aromatic dibasic acid or an ester-forming derivative thereof and a diol or an ester-forming derivative thereof.
  • Specific examples of such polyester include polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene isophthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, poly (1,4-cyclohexylenedimethylene terephthalate), polyethylene-2,6-naphthalate and the like. Of these, polyethylene terephthalate or polyethylene-2,6-naphthalate is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of balance between mechanical properties and cost.
  • the polyester may be a homopolymer or a copolymer. Further, the polyester may be blended with a small amount of another type of resin such as polyimide.
  • an Sb-based, Ge-based or Ti-based compound as a catalyst from the viewpoint of keeping the carboxyl group content below a predetermined range, and among these, a Ti-based compound is particularly preferable.
  • a Ti-based compound an embodiment is preferred in which the Ti-based compound is polymerized by using it as a catalyst so that the Ti element conversion value is in the range of 1 ppm to 30 ppm, more preferably 3 ppm to 15 ppm.
  • the amount of Ti compound used is within the above range in terms of Ti element, the terminal carboxyl group can be adjusted to the following range, and the hydrolysis resistance of the polymer substrate can be kept low.
  • Examples of the synthesis of polyester using a Ti compound include Japanese Patent Publication No. 8-301198, Japanese Patent No. 2543624, Japanese Patent No. 3335683, Japanese Patent No. 3717380, Japanese Patent No. 397756, Japanese Patent No. 39622626, and Japanese Patent No. 39786666.
  • No. 3, Patent No. 3,996,871, Patent No. 40000867, Patent No. 4053837, Patent No. 4,127,119, Patent No. 4,134,710, Patent No. 4,159,154, Patent No. 4,269,704, Patent No. 4,313,538 and the like can be applied.
  • the carboxyl group content in the polyester is preferably 50 equivalents / t or less, more preferably 35 equivalents / t or less.
  • the lower limit of the carboxyl group content is preferably 2 equivalents / t in terms of maintaining adhesion between the layer formed on the polyester (for example, a colored layer).
  • the carboxyl group content in the polyester can be adjusted by the polymerization catalyst species and the film forming conditions (film forming temperature and time). In the present specification, “equivalent / ton” represents a molar equivalent per ton.
  • the polyester in the present invention is preferably solid-phase polymerized after polymerization.
  • Solid-phase polymerization may be a continuous method (a method in which a tower is filled with a resin, which is slowly heated for a predetermined time and then sent out), or a batch method (a resin is charged into a container). , A method of heating for a predetermined time).
  • Japanese Patent No. 2621563, Japanese Patent No. 3121876, Japanese Patent No. 3136774, Japanese Patent No. 3603585, Japanese Patent No. 3616522, Japanese Patent No. 3617340, Japanese Patent No. 3680523, Japanese Patent No. 3717392 are disclosed.
  • the method described in Japanese Patent No. 4167159 can be applied.
  • the temperature of the solid phase polymerization is preferably 170 ° C. or higher and 240 ° C. or lower, more preferably 180 ° C. or higher and 230 ° C. or lower, and further preferably 190 ° C. or higher and 220 ° C. or lower.
  • the solid phase polymerization time is preferably 5 hours to 100 hours, more preferably 10 hours to 75 hours, and still more preferably 15 hours to 50 hours.
  • the solid phase polymerization is preferably performed in a vacuum or in a nitrogen atmosphere.
  • the polyester base material in the present invention is obtained by melt-extruding the above polyester into a film shape and then cooling and solidifying it with a casting drum to form an unstretched film.
  • the unstretched film is subjected to a longitudinal direction at Tg to (Tg + 60) ° C.
  • a biaxially stretched film that has been stretched once or twice or so so that the total magnification is 3 to 6 times, and then stretched so that the magnification is 3 to 5 times in the width direction at Tg to (Tg + 60) ° C.
  • heat treatment may be performed at 180 to 230 ° C. for 1 to 60 seconds as necessary.
  • Tg represents a glass transition temperature and can be measured based on JIS K7121 or ASTM D3418-82. For example. In the present invention, measurement is performed using a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation. Specifically, 10 mg of a polymer such as polyester is weighed as a sample, set in an aluminum pan, and heated at a rate of temperature increase of 10 ° C./min from room temperature to a final temperature of 300 ° C., with a DSC device, the amount of heat relative to temperature Was measured as the glass transition temperature.
  • DSC differential scanning calorimeter
  • the thickness of the polymer substrate (particularly the polyester substrate) is preferably about 25 to 300 ⁇ m. If the thickness is 25 ⁇ m or more, the mechanical strength is good, and if it is 300 ⁇ m or less, it is advantageous in terms of cost.
  • the polyester base material has a tendency to deteriorate the hydrolysis resistance as the thickness increases and cannot withstand long-term use. In the present invention, the thickness of the polyester base material is 120 ⁇ m or more and 300 ⁇ m or less, and When the content of the carboxyl group in the polyester is 2 to 50 equivalent / t, the effect of improving the wet heat durability is further exhibited.
  • the resin film of the present invention is configured by providing a polymer layer forming step as described above.
  • a specific manufacturing method for example, (1) adding and emulsifying and dispersing an oil phase containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) in an aqueous phase containing a water-soluble resin (eg, PVA); (2) Contains an emulsion obtained by the above emulsification dispersion, a fluorine-based polymer and / or a silicone-based polymer, and, if necessary, a crosslinking agent or a surfactant, and preferably 50% by mass or more of the solvent is water.
  • a water-soluble resin eg, PVA
  • the adhesiveness after wet heat aging can be enhanced by curing the polymer layer.
  • a step for forming another layer can be further provided in addition to the above step.
  • a coating liquid containing the components constituting the other layer is applied on the polymer substrate (for example, the side opposite to the side on which the polymer layer of the polymer substrate is formed).
  • coating is mentioned. Examples thereof include the methods described above as the method for forming the easily adhesive layer and the colored layer.
  • the resin film of this invention is used suitably for the use of the solar cell backsheet.
  • solar cell backsheets include: (1) A reflection containing a polymer layer on one side of a polymer substrate and a white pigment on the other side opposite to the side on which the polymer layer is coated (2) A polymer layer is coated on one side of the polymer substrate, and the other side opposite to the side on which the polymer layer is coated is colored The thing etc. which the colored layer containing a pigment was coated can be mentioned.
  • the polymer layer of the polymer base material is not coated with a sheet or film having one or more layers having a desired function.
  • the method of bonding to the other side is mentioned.
  • the sheet or film in this case is a sheet or film having one or more other layers. Specifically, a polymer layer is applied and formed on one side of a polymer substrate, and a white pigment (or a colored pigment other than white) is formed on the other side opposite to the side on which the polymer layer is formed.
  • a coating solution for forming a polymer layer may be applied to the polymer substrate after biaxial stretching, or the polymer after uniaxial stretching After the coating liquid for forming the polymer layer is applied to the substrate and dried, it may be stretched in a direction different from the direction of uniaxial stretching. Further, the coating solution may be applied to an unstretched polymer support and dried, and then stretched in two directions.
  • Example 1 -Fabrication of support- (1) Synthesis of polyester A slurry of 100 kg of high-purity terephthalic acid (manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals) and 45 kg of ethylene glycol (manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.) was charged with about 123 kg of bis (hydroxyethyl) terephthalate in advance and the temperature was 250 The esterification reaction tank maintained at a temperature of 1.2 ° C. and a pressure of 1.2 ⁇ 10 5 Pa was sequentially supplied over 4 hours, and the esterification reaction was carried out over an additional hour after the completion of the supply. Thereafter, 123 kg of the obtained esterification reaction product was transferred to a polycondensation reaction tank.
  • JP-A-2005-340616 was used. Five minutes later, a 10% by mass ethylene glycol solution of ethyl diethylphosphonoacetate was added so as to be 5 ppm with respect to the resulting polymer.
  • the reaction system was gradually heated from 250 ° C. to 285 ° C. and the pressure was reduced to 40 Pa. The time to reach the final temperature and final pressure was both 60 minutes. The reaction was continued for 3 hours, and then the reaction system was purged with nitrogen and returned to normal pressure to stop the polycondensation reaction. Then, the obtained polymer melt was discharged into cold water in a strand form and immediately cut to produce polymer pellets (diameter: about 3 mm, length: about 7 mm).
  • undercoat layer-forming coating solution was applied to one surface of a PET support so that the amount of the binder was 0.1 g / m 2 and applied at 180 ° C for 1 minute.
  • An undercoat layer having a dry thickness of about 0.1 ⁇ m was formed by drying.
  • Titanium Dioxide Dispersion Components in the following composition were mixed, and the mixture was subjected to dispersion treatment for 1 hour using a dynomill type disperser.
  • composition of coating solution > ⁇ Titanium dioxide dispersion: 800.0 parts ⁇ Polyolefin binder: 108.0 parts (Arrow Base SE1010, manufactured by Unitika Ltd., solid content: 20% by mass) Polyoxyalkylene alkyl ether 30.0 parts (Naroacty CL95, manufactured by Sanyo Chemical Industries, solid content: 1% by mass) Oxazoline compound: 20.0 parts (Epocross WS-700, manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd., solid content: 25%; crosslinking agent) ⁇ Distilled water ... 42.0 parts
  • the oil phase liquid was added while stirring the obtained aqueous phase liquid at 500 rpm using a dissolver. After the addition, stirring was continued for another 5 minutes to obtain a uniform mixed solution.
  • the resulting mixed liquid (25 ° C.) was further stirred using a dissolver at 20,000 rpm for 10 minutes at 25 ° C. to obtain an emulsion (emulsion) 1.
  • the average particle size of the obtained emulsion 1 was measured by a laser analysis / scattering particle size distribution measuring apparatus LA950 (manufactured by Horiba, Ltd.), and the median size was 120 nm.
  • the organic solvent was distilled off from the emulsion 1 using an evaporator to obtain a dispersion 1.
  • the amount of the remaining organic solvent was measured by gas chromatography and found to be 0.7% by mass or less.
  • the concentration of Compound A-1 in Dispersion 1 was 13% by mass.
  • the average particle diameter of Dispersion 1 was measured by the same method as described above, the median diameter was 121 nm.
  • the obtained coating solution for forming the back layer 1 is coated with a binder coating amount of 3.0 g / m 2 on the support surface opposite to the side on which the reflective layer of the PET support is formed. Then, the compound A-1 was applied in an amount of 1.1 g / m 2 and dried at 180 ° C. for 1 minute to form a back layer 1 (polymer layer) having a dry thickness of about 3 ⁇ m.
  • Adhesion was performed under the condition that a vacuum laminator was evacuated at 128 ° C. for 3 minutes, then pressure-bonded for 2 minutes to perform temporary adhesion, and further in a dry oven at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes. In this way, a crystalline solar cell module was produced. When power generation operation was performed using the produced solar cell module, it showed good power generation performance as a solar cell.
  • Example 1 (Examples 2 to 10)
  • a backsheet sample was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the concentration and coating amount of Compound A-1, and the binder concentration were changed as shown in Table 1 below.
  • a battery module was produced. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 below.
  • Example 8 (Examples 11 to 14, Comparative Examples 1 to 3)
  • the compound A-1 used for the preparation of the coating solution for forming the back layer 1 was changed to the following compounds A-2 to A-5 and A-101 to A-103.
  • a backsheet sample was prepared and evaluated, and a solar cell module was prepared. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 below.
  • Example 15 In Example 8, on the surface of the back layer 1 (polymer layer) formed on the surface opposite to the side on which the reflective layer of the PET support is provided, the back layer 2 forming application is performed according to the following procedure. A backsheet sample was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 8 except that the back layer 2 (protective polymer layer) was further formed by applying the liquid, and a solar cell module was prepared. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 below.
  • Example 15 a backsheet sample was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 15 except that the binder type or ultraviolet absorber type of the back layer 1 was changed as shown in Table 1 below. A module was produced. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 below.
  • each backsheet sample was measured using a spectroscopic color difference meter “Spectro Color Meter SE2000” manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd. Thereafter, each backsheet sample was irradiated with ultraviolet light at an illuminance of 900 W / m 2 for 48 hours using a light resistance tester “I Super UV Tester W-151” manufactured by Iwasaki Electric Co., Ltd. However, environmental conditions at the time of ultraviolet light irradiation were 63 ° C. and 50% RH.
  • YI value (YI-2) of each backsheet sample was measured again using the same spectral color difference meter (Spectro Color Meter SE2000, manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd.).
  • YI (YI ⁇ 2) ⁇ (YI ⁇ 1) was determined from the measured values, and was used as an index indicating the degree of coloring of each backsheet sample, and was ranked according to the following evaluation criteria based on the YI value. Of these, ranks 3 to 5 are practically acceptable.
  • sample A was sandwiched between upper and lower clips with Tensilon (produced by ORIENTEC, RTC-1210A), peeling angle 180 °, pulling speed A tensile test was performed at 300 mm / min.
  • the length of the sample A to be stretched was 10 cm, and the tensile speed was 20 mm / min.
  • the elongation at break of the sample A obtained in this study and L 0.
  • the sample B was subjected to a wet heat treatment in an atmosphere of 120 ° C. and 100% RH for 50 hours, and then a tensile test was performed in the same manner as the sample A.
  • the elongation at break of Sample B at this time is L 1.
  • Adhesiveness- [A] Adhesiveness before wet heat aging Each backsheet sample was cut into a width of 20 mm ⁇ 150 mm to prepare two sample pieces. These two sample pieces are arranged so that the reflection layer side is inside, and an EVA sheet (EVA sheet manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals Fabro Co., Ltd .: SC50B) cut between 20 mm width ⁇ 100 mm length is sandwiched between them It was made to adhere to EVA by hot pressing using a laminator (vacuum laminator manufactured by Nisshinbo Co., Ltd.). The bonding conditions at this time were as follows. Using a vacuum laminator, evacuation was performed at 128 ° C.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Photovoltaic Devices (AREA)
  • Coating Of Shaped Articles Made Of Macromolecular Substances (AREA)
  • Compositions Of Macromolecular Compounds (AREA)
  • Application Of Or Painting With Fluid Materials (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides a method for manufacturing a resin film that forms a coating film that coats a surface well and exhibits excellent adhesion to an adjacent organic material. Said method comprises a step in which a coating fluid containing at least a compound represented by general formula (1) and a binder polymer is applied to a support, forming a polymer layer. (R1a through R1e each represent a monovalent substituent other than a hydroxy group (at least one of R1a through R1e represents a substituent for which σρ in the Hammett equation is at least 0.3, and the substituents represented by R1a through R1e may be bound to each other, forming a ring), and R1g through R1k, R1m, R1n, and R1p each represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent (said substituents may be bound to each other, forming a ring).)

Description

樹脂フィルム及びその製造方法Resin film and method for producing the same
 本発明は、樹脂フィルム及びその製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a resin film and a manufacturing method thereof.
 従来から、紫外吸収能を付与して長期耐久性を高める技術が知られており、例えば、ポリエステルに紫外線吸収剤を含有させる技術が開示されている(例えば、特開2009-188105号公報参照)。 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique for imparting ultraviolet absorbing ability to enhance long-term durability is known. For example, a technique for incorporating an ultraviolet absorbent into polyester has been disclosed (see, for example, JP 2009-188105 A). .
 紫外線吸収剤としては、無機系及び有機系の紫外線吸収剤が知られている。このうち、有機系の紫外線吸収剤は、無機系の紫外線吸収剤に比べて、化合物構造の設計自由度が高いことから、分子構造を工夫することにより様々な吸収波長のものが得られる。そのため、従来から種々の有機系紫外線吸収剤が提案されており、その一例として、トリアゾール系の紫外線吸収剤が開示されている(例えば、特表2002-524452号公報参照)。また、特定の位置にアルコキシ基及びヒドロキシ基を有するトリスアリール-s-トリアジンに関する開示がある(例えば、特許第3965631号参照)。ところが、極大吸収波長が長波紫外線領域にあるものは、耐光性が悪い傾向があり、紫外線遮蔽効果は時間とともに減少する。そのため、紫外線曝光下に長期間置かれる使用形態では、遮蔽効果が維持できないために長期耐久性を大きく向上できない状況にあった。 As the ultraviolet absorber, inorganic and organic ultraviolet absorbers are known. Among these, organic ultraviolet absorbers have a higher degree of design freedom in compound structure than inorganic ultraviolet absorbers, and therefore, various absorption wavelengths can be obtained by devising the molecular structure. For this reason, various organic ultraviolet absorbers have been proposed, and as one example, a triazole ultraviolet absorber has been disclosed (for example, see JP-T-2002-524452). In addition, there is disclosure relating to trisaryl-s-triazine having an alkoxy group and a hydroxy group at specific positions (see, for example, Japanese Patent No. 3965631). However, those having a maximum absorption wavelength in the long wave ultraviolet region tend to have poor light resistance, and the ultraviolet shielding effect decreases with time. For this reason, in a usage form that is left for a long time under ultraviolet light exposure, the shielding effect cannot be maintained, so that the long-term durability cannot be greatly improved.
 特に近年注目されている太陽電池等は、屋外で長時間太陽光の下に曝される使用形態が通常であり、長期経時で次第に劣化が進行すると、発電性能の低下を来たす。したがって、UV-A領域(400~315nm)に至る広い紫外域で長期に亘って安定したUV遮蔽効果を示すような化合物が求められる。 In particular, solar cells and the like that have been attracting attention in recent years are usually used outdoors under long periods of sunlight, and when the deterioration progresses gradually over a long period of time, the power generation performance decreases. Accordingly, there is a demand for a compound that exhibits a stable UV shielding effect over a long period of time in a wide ultraviolet region extending to the UV-A region (400 to 315 nm).
 一方、従来から用いられているベンゾフェノン系やベンゾトリアゾール系の紫外線吸収剤は、比較的耐光性がよく、濃度や膜厚を大きくすれば、長波長領域まで比較的クリアに紫外線をカットすることができる(例えば、特開平6-145387号公報、特開2003-177235号公報参照)。 On the other hand, conventional benzophenone and benzotriazole UV absorbers have relatively good light resistance, and if the concentration and film thickness are increased, UV rays can be cut relatively clearly up to the long wavelength region. (For example, refer to JP-A-6-145387 and JP-A-2003-177235).
 上記のように、紫外線に曝されやすい環境下で長期に亘って使用される用途の1つとして、近年、太陽電池が注目されている。太陽電池モジュールは、一般に、太陽光が直接入射する側に配置される透明性のガラス基板と、太陽光が入射する側とは反対側(裏面側)に配置される裏面保護用のいわゆるバックシートとの間に、太陽電池セルが挟まれた構造を有している。ガラスと太陽電池セルとの間、及び太陽電池セルとバックシートとの間は、一般にEVA(エチレン-ビニルアセテート)樹脂などの封止剤で封止されている。 As described above, in recent years, solar cells have attracted attention as one of applications that are used for a long time in an environment that is easily exposed to ultraviolet rays. A solar cell module is generally a transparent glass substrate disposed on the side on which sunlight is directly incident, and a so-called back sheet for protecting the back surface disposed on the side opposite to the side on which sunlight is incident (back side). Between the two solar cells. The space between the glass and the solar battery cell and the space between the solar battery cell and the back sheet are generally sealed with a sealing agent such as EVA (ethylene-vinyl acetate) resin.
 バックシートは、太陽電池モジュールの裏面からの水分の浸入を防止する働きを有するものであり、コスト等の観点から、ポリエステルが用いられるようになっている。ポリエステルを用いたバックシートとしては、例えば、光反射性を持つ着色層や封止材に対して易接着性の層をポリエステル支持体に付与したものが知られている(例えば、特開2007-118267号公報参照)。 The back sheet has a function of preventing moisture from entering from the back surface of the solar cell module, and polyester is used from the viewpoint of cost and the like. As a backsheet using polyester, for example, a sheet having a polyester support provided with a light-reflective colored layer or a layer that easily adheres to a sealing material is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-2007). 118267).
 しかしながら、紫外線等に長時間連続的に曝された場合、400nm付近の長波紫外線(UV-A)領域に至る広い領域に亘って吸収することまでは難しく、紫外線吸収剤を用いても長期使用に耐える耐久性能を確保できるに至っていないのが実情である。また、太陽光に曝されたときには、その受光面のみならず、反射等により側部や裏面にも光が回り込むため、裏面に配されるバックシートの耐久性にも大きな影響を与える。そのため、UV-A領域を含む広い紫外域で長期に亘って安定したUV遮蔽効果を保てる技術の確立が求められている。 However, when exposed to ultraviolet rays or the like for a long time, it is difficult to absorb over a wide area up to 400 nm in the long wave ultraviolet (UV-A) region. The fact is that it has not yet been able to ensure the durability performance to withstand. In addition, when exposed to sunlight, not only the light receiving surface but also the side portion and the back surface due to reflection or the like, so that the durability of the back sheet disposed on the back surface is greatly affected. Therefore, establishment of a technique capable of maintaining a stable UV shielding effect over a long period in a wide ultraviolet region including the UV-A region is required.
 一方、紫外線吸収剤は一般に樹脂等と混合して用いられるが、紫外線吸収剤の濃度やそれを含む膜の厚みを増す方法では、膜厚は数十μm程度が限界とされる制約の中では、長波長領域で紫外吸収能を付与するには高濃度に紫外線吸収剤を含有させなければならない。しかしながら、単に高濃度に含有しようとすると、紫外線吸収剤が析出し易くなるほか、長期使用時にブリードアウトを招き、また臭気性が悪化する課題がある。 On the other hand, UV absorbers are generally used by mixing with resin, etc. However, in the method of increasing the concentration of UV absorber and the thickness of the film containing it, the thickness is limited to about several tens of μm. In order to impart ultraviolet absorbing ability in the long wavelength region, an ultraviolet absorber must be contained at a high concentration. However, if it is simply contained in a high concentration, there is a problem that the ultraviolet absorber is liable to precipitate, causes bleed out during long-term use, and deteriorates odor.
 また、従来から知られているベンゾフェノン系やベンゾトリアゾール系の紫外線吸収剤は、溶解性が低いものが多く、従って実際には従来の塗布法で良好に塗膜形成することは難しいという課題もある。 In addition, benzophenone-based and benzotriazole-based UV absorbers known in the past often have low solubility, so there is a problem that it is actually difficult to form a coating film well by the conventional coating method. .
 本発明は、上記に鑑みなされたものであり、塗布面状が良好で隣接する有機材料との間の接着性に優れた塗布膜を形成する樹脂フィルムの製造方法、及び、400nm付近の長波紫外線(UV-A)領域を含む広い波長領域で紫外線遮蔽効果を有し優れた耐光性能を示すと共に、面状良好で塗布層の接着性に優れた樹脂フィルムを提供することを目的とし、該目的を達成することを課題とする。 The present invention has been made in view of the above, a method for producing a resin film that forms a coating film having a good coating surface shape and excellent adhesion between adjacent organic materials, and a long-wave ultraviolet light around 400 nm. An object of the present invention is to provide a resin film that has an ultraviolet shielding effect in a wide wavelength region including the (UV-A) region, exhibits excellent light resistance, and has a good surface shape and excellent adhesion of the coating layer. The goal is to achieve this.
 前記課題を達成するための具体的手段は以下の通りである。
 <1> 少なくとも下記一般式(1)で表される化合物とバインダーポリマーとを含有する塗布液を支持体上に塗布してポリマー層を形成するポリマー層形成工程を有する樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。
Specific means for achieving the above object are as follows.
<1> A method for producing a resin film having a polymer layer forming step of forming a polymer layer by applying a coating liquid containing at least a compound represented by the following general formula (1) and a binder polymer on a support. .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

 
 前記一般式(1)において、R1a、R1b、R1c、R1d、及びR1eは、各々独立に、ヒドロキシ基を除く1価の置換基を表し、R1a~R1eの少なくとも1つはハメット則のσp値が0.3以上である置換基を表す。R1a~R1eで表される置換基は、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n、及びR1pは、各々独立に、水素原子、又は1価の置換基を表し、該置換基は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。 In the general formula (1), R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d , and R 1e each independently represent a monovalent substituent other than a hydroxy group, and at least one of R 1a to R 1e Represents a substituent having a Hammett's rule σp value of 0.3 or more. The substituents represented by R 1a to R 1e may be bonded to each other to form a ring. R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n , and R 1p each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and the substituents are bonded to each other A ring may be formed.
 <2> 前記一般式(1)のR1a、R1c、及びR1eが水素原子を表し、R1b及びR1dの少なくとも1つが、アルコキシカルボニル基(COOR〔R:アルキル基〕)、ニトロ基(NO)、シアノ基(CN)、フルオロアルキル基(R)、スルホン酸又はそのアルカリ金属塩(SOH又はSOM〔M:アルカリ金属〕)である前記<1>に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。
 <3> 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物の前記塗布液中における濃度が、塗布液の全質量に対して、3質量%以上9質量%以下であり、前記バインダーポリマーの前記塗布液中における濃度が、塗布液の全質量に対して、6質量%以上25質量%以下である前記<1>又は前記<2>に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。
 <4> 更に、前記一般式(1)で表される化合物を溶媒中に分散して分散液を調製する工程を含み、
 前記ポリマー層形成工程は、前記分散液を用いて前記一般式(1)で表される化合物が分散状態で含有された前記塗布液を塗布する前記<1>~前記<3>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。
<2> R 1a , R 1c , and R 1e in the general formula (1) represent a hydrogen atom, and at least one of R 1b and R 1d is an alkoxycarbonyl group (COOR n [R n : alkyl group]), <1> which is a nitro group (NO 2 ), a cyano group (CN), a fluoroalkyl group (R f ), a sulfonic acid or an alkali metal salt thereof (SO 3 H or SO 3 M [M: alkali metal]) It is a manufacturing method of the resin film of description.
<3> The concentration of the compound represented by the general formula (1) in the coating liquid is 3% by mass to 9% by mass with respect to the total mass of the coating liquid, and the coating liquid of the binder polymer It is a manufacturing method of the resin film as described in said <1> or <2> whose density in the inside is 6 mass% or more and 25 mass% or less with respect to the total mass of a coating liquid.
<4> Further, the method includes a step of preparing a dispersion by dispersing the compound represented by the general formula (1) in a solvent,
In the polymer layer forming step, any one of the above <1> to <3>, wherein the coating liquid containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) in a dispersed state is applied using the dispersion liquid. It is a manufacturing method of the resin film as described in one.
 <5> 前記バインダーポリマーの少なくとも一種として、フッ素系ポリマー及びシリコーン系ポリマーから選ばれるポリマーを含有する前記<1>~前記<4>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。
 <6> 前記塗布液は、更に、前記バインダーを架橋する架橋剤を含有する前記<1>~前記<5>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。
 <7>
 前記架橋剤が、カルボジイミド系架橋剤、及び/又はオキサゾリン系架橋剤である、前記<6>に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。 
 <8> 前記架橋剤のポリマー層中における含有量が、前記バインダーポリマーに対して、0.5質量%以上40質量%以下である、前記<6>又は前記<7>に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。
 <9> 前記塗布液は、更に溶媒を含み、前記溶媒の50質量%以上が水である前記<1>~前記<8>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。
 <10> 前記支持体が、ポリエステル基材である前記<1>~前記<9>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。
<5> The method for producing a resin film according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein a polymer selected from a fluorine-based polymer and a silicone-based polymer is contained as at least one of the binder polymers.
<6> The method for producing a resin film according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the coating liquid further contains a crosslinking agent that crosslinks the binder.
<7>
It is a manufacturing method of the resin film as described in said <6> whose said crosslinking agent is a carbodiimide type crosslinking agent and / or an oxazoline type crosslinking agent.
<8> The resin film according to <6> or <7>, wherein the content of the crosslinking agent in the polymer layer is 0.5% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less with respect to the binder polymer. It is a manufacturing method.
<9> The method for producing a resin film according to any one of <1> to <8>, wherein the coating liquid further contains a solvent, and 50% by mass or more of the solvent is water.
<10> The method for producing a resin film according to any one of <1> to <9>, wherein the support is a polyester base material.
 <11> 前記ポリマー層が形成された側とは反対側の支持体上に、少なくとも顔料とバインダーとを含有する塗布液を塗布して着色層を形成する着色層形成工程を更に有する、前記<1>~前記<10>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。
 <12> 少なくとも前記バインダーポリマーを含有する保護層用塗布液を前記ポリマー層上に塗布して保護層を形成する保護層形成工程を有する前記<1>~前記<11>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。
 <13> 太陽電池素子が封止材で封止された電池側基板の太陽光が入射する側と反対側に設けられる太陽電池用バックシートとして用いられる前記<1>~前記<12>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法である。
<11> A colored layer forming step of forming a colored layer by applying a coating solution containing at least a pigment and a binder on a support opposite to the side on which the polymer layer is formed, 1> to the method for producing a resin film according to any one of <10>.
<12> In any one of the above items <1> to <11>, including a protective layer forming step of forming a protective layer by applying a coating solution for a protective layer containing at least the binder polymer on the polymer layer It is a manufacturing method of the resin film of description.
<13> Any one of the above <1> to <12>, which is used as a solar cell backsheet provided on a side opposite to a side on which solar light is incident on a battery side substrate in which a solar cell element is sealed with a sealing material It is a manufacturing method of the resin film as described in any one.
 本発明によれば、塗布面状が良好で隣接する有機材料との間の接着性に優れた塗布膜を形成する樹脂フィルムの製造方法を提供することができる。また、
 本発明によれば、400nm付近の長波紫外線(UV-A)領域を含む広い波長領域で紫外線遮蔽効果を有し優れた耐光性能を示すと共に、面状良好で塗布層の接着性に優れた樹脂フィルムを提供することができる。
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the manufacturing method of the resin film which forms the coating film excellent in the adhesiveness between the organic materials with favorable coating surface shape and adjacent can be provided. Also,
According to the present invention, a resin having an ultraviolet shielding effect in a wide wavelength region including a long-wave ultraviolet (UV-A) region near 400 nm, exhibiting excellent light resistance, and having a good surface shape and excellent adhesion of a coating layer. A film can be provided.
 以下、本発明の樹脂フィルムの製造方法について詳細に説明し、該説明を通じて本発明の樹脂フィルムの詳細についても説明する。 Hereinafter, the method for producing the resin film of the present invention will be described in detail, and the details of the resin film of the present invention will also be described through the description.
 本発明の樹脂フィルムの製造方法は、少なくとも以下に示す一般式(1)で表される化合物とバインダーポリマーとを含有する塗布液を支持体上に塗布してポリマー層を形成する工程(以下、「ポリマー層形成工程」ということがある。)を設けて構成されたものであり、必要に応じて、更に、塗布後の塗布膜を加熱乾燥する乾燥工程などの他の工程を設けて構成されてもよい。 The method for producing a resin film of the present invention comprises a step of forming a polymer layer by applying a coating liquid containing at least a compound represented by the general formula (1) shown below and a binder polymer on a support (hereinafter referred to as a polymer layer). It may also be referred to as a “polymer layer forming step.”), And if necessary, further provided with other steps such as a drying step for heating and drying the coated film after coating. May be.
 本発明においては、トリアゾール系化合物の溶解性が低く従来から均一な塗工は難しいとされているところ、紫外線吸収剤(以下、UV剤と略記することがある。)として特定構造を持つ化合物を用い、該化合物を支持体中に練り込むのではなく、該化合物をバインダーポリマーと共に含有した混合液の塗布により形成することで、良好な塗布面状が得られ、少ない塗布量(薄膜)としながら支持体表面近傍にUV剤を偏在させるために、長期に亘って優れた耐光性能が保持される。特に、400nm付近の長波紫外線(UV-A)領域を含む広い範囲で紫外線遮蔽効果に優れる。また、特定構造を持つ化合物の塗布量を少なくできるので、隣接する有機材料(支持体表面に塗布したときは支持体)との間の接着性に優れた塗布膜の形成が可能である。 In the present invention, the triazole-based compound has low solubility and has been conventionally considered to be difficult to apply uniformly. However, a compound having a specific structure as an ultraviolet absorber (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as UV agent) is used. Using the compound in a support, instead of kneading it into the support, it is formed by coating a mixed solution containing the compound together with a binder polymer, so that a good coated surface can be obtained and the coating amount is small (thin film). Since the UV agent is unevenly distributed in the vicinity of the support surface, excellent light resistance is maintained over a long period of time. In particular, the ultraviolet shielding effect is excellent in a wide range including a long wave ultraviolet (UV-A) region around 400 nm. Moreover, since the coating amount of the compound having a specific structure can be reduced, it is possible to form a coating film having excellent adhesion with an adjacent organic material (a support when applied to the support surface).
 本発明におけるポリマー層としては、特に制限はなく、用途などに応じて支持体上に設けられる層のいずれであってもよい。例えば、本発明の樹脂フィルムが太陽電池の用途に適用され、太陽光が直接入射する側とは反対側(裏面側)に配置される裏面保護用のいわゆるバックシートとして用いられる場合、本発明におけるポリマー層を、(1)顔料等の着色剤を含む着色層、太陽電池素子を備えた電池側基板(特に太陽電池素子を封止するEVA等の封止材)との接着性を高める易接着性層、電池側基板と対向しない側に設けられる裏面保護層などとして形成することができる。なお、前記着色層には、例えば、白色顔料を含み、太陽電池セルを通過してバックシートに到達した光を反射し太陽電池セルに戻す反射層、外観の装飾性を高める意匠性層が含まれる。 The polymer layer in the present invention is not particularly limited and may be any layer provided on the support depending on the application. For example, when the resin film of the present invention is applied to the use of a solar cell and used as a so-called back sheet for protecting the back surface disposed on the side opposite to the side on which sunlight directly enters (back side), Easy adhesion to improve the adhesion of the polymer layer to (1) a colored layer containing a colorant such as a pigment and a battery-side substrate (especially a sealing material such as EVA for sealing the solar cell element) provided with the solar cell element. Or a back surface protective layer provided on the side not facing the battery side substrate. The colored layer includes, for example, a white pigment, a reflective layer that reflects light that has passed through the solar cells and reaches the back sheet and returns to the solar cells, and a design layer that enhances the decorativeness of the appearance. It is.
 本発明におけるポリマー層形成工程では、塗布液を支持体上に塗布してポリマー層を形成する。塗布によることで、例えばUV剤を含むフィルムの貼合による場合に比べ、薄膜での形成が可能であり、また以下に示す一般式(1)で表される化合物を樹脂フィルムの表面近傍に多く偏在させることが可能で、より少量で高い紫外線遮蔽効果、すなわち耐光性能が得られる。 In the polymer layer forming step in the present invention, a coating solution is applied on a support to form a polymer layer. By coating, for example, it is possible to form a thin film as compared with the case of pasting a film containing a UV agent, and many compounds represented by the following general formula (1) are present near the surface of the resin film. It can be unevenly distributed, and a higher UV shielding effect, that is, light resistance can be obtained with a smaller amount.
 ポリマー層の乾燥厚みとしては、0.5~10.0μmが好ましい。ポリマー層の厚みが0.5μm以上であると、より薄膜で高い紫外線遮蔽効果を発揮し、より高い耐久性能を示すほか、ポリマー支持体との間の接着力が良好になる。また、ポリマー層の厚みが10.0μm以下であると、面状がより良好なり、隣接層やポリマー基材との間の接着力に優れる。すなわち、ポリマー層の厚みが0.5~4.0μmの範囲内であることにより、ポリマー層の耐久性と面状とが両立し、ポリマー基材とポリマー層との間の接着性により優れる。
 ポリマー層の厚みは、特に1.0~5.0μmの範囲がより好ましい。
 ポリマー層は、単層で設けられてもよいし、二層以上が設けられた態様でもよい。
The dry thickness of the polymer layer is preferably 0.5 to 10.0 μm. When the thickness of the polymer layer is 0.5 μm or more, it exhibits a higher ultraviolet shielding effect with a thinner film, exhibits higher durability performance, and has good adhesion to the polymer support. In addition, when the thickness of the polymer layer is 10.0 μm or less, the surface shape becomes better, and the adhesive strength between the adjacent layer and the polymer substrate is excellent. That is, when the thickness of the polymer layer is in the range of 0.5 to 4.0 μm, the durability and planarity of the polymer layer are compatible, and the adhesion between the polymer substrate and the polymer layer is superior.
The thickness of the polymer layer is particularly preferably in the range of 1.0 to 5.0 μm.
The polymer layer may be provided as a single layer or may be provided with two or more layers.
 塗布液は、以下に示す一般式(1)で表される化合物とバインダーポリマーと溶媒と必要に応じて分散剤や界面活性剤、架橋剤、顔料、一般式(1)で表される化合物以外の紫外線吸収剤等の各種添加剤などの他の成分とを含有して調製される混合液である。本発明における塗布液は、好ましくは、少なくとも一般式(1)で表される化合物は液中に分散された分散状態で含有される。
 一般式(1)で表される化合物は、これを溶解する溶媒に溶解して用いられてもよいが、溶媒に分散させた分散液とし、塗布液中に分散粒子として存在させることが好ましい。一般式(1)で表される化合物を分散状態で塗布液中に含ませることで、溶解して含ませる場合に比べ、ポリマー層とした後に湿熱環境等に曝される等した場合に、層中からの染み出す現象を防ぐことができる。
The coating solution is a compound represented by the following general formula (1), a binder polymer, a solvent, and a dispersant, a surfactant, a crosslinking agent, a pigment, or a compound represented by the general formula (1) as necessary. And other components such as various additives such as UV absorbers. The coating liquid in the present invention preferably contains at least the compound represented by the general formula (1) in a dispersed state dispersed in the liquid.
The compound represented by the general formula (1) may be used after being dissolved in a solvent that dissolves the compound. However, it is preferable that the compound is dispersed in a solvent and is present as dispersed particles in the coating solution. When the compound represented by the general formula (1) is contained in the coating solution in a dispersed state, the layer is formed when the polymer layer is exposed to a moist heat environment or the like compared to the case where it is dissolved and contained. The phenomenon of exuding from the inside can be prevented.
 具体的には、本発明の樹脂フィルムの製造方法では、一般式(1)で表される化合物を溶媒に分散して分散液を調製する分散工程を有していることが好ましい。本発明におけるポリマー層形成工程では、分散工程で調製された分散液とバインダーポリマーと必要に応じて界面活性剤や架橋剤などの他の成分とを混合して、ポリマー層形成用の塗布液を調製し、該塗布液を支持体上に塗布することにより、ポリマー層が好適に形成される。 Specifically, the method for producing a resin film of the present invention preferably includes a dispersion step of preparing a dispersion by dispersing the compound represented by the general formula (1) in a solvent. In the polymer layer forming step in the present invention, the dispersion prepared in the dispersing step, the binder polymer, and other components such as a surfactant and a crosslinking agent as necessary are mixed to form a coating solution for forming the polymer layer. A polymer layer is suitably formed by preparing and apply | coating this coating liquid on a support body.
 ここで、分散状態とは、水性媒体(水相)中に一般式(1)で表される化合物の溶液が水不溶性の相(油相)の状態で分散した状態(エマルション)、及び、水性媒体中に水不溶性の化合物が固体状態又は液体状態で分散された分散状態(サスペンジョン)の両方の状態を含むものである。分散状態で含有されていることにより、ポリマー層を形成した後に層内に留めることができ、ブリードアウトの発生が防止される。 Here, the dispersed state means a state (emulsion) in which a solution of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is dispersed in a water-insoluble phase (oil phase) in an aqueous medium (aqueous phase), and an aqueous solution. It includes both a dispersed state (suspension) in which a water-insoluble compound is dispersed in a medium in a solid state or a liquid state. By being contained in a dispersed state, it can be retained in the layer after forming the polymer layer, and the occurrence of bleed out is prevented.
 前記分散工程は、例えばエマルションを調製する場合、一般式(1)で表される化合物を溶媒に添加して攪拌し、該化合物が溶解した油相を調製し、これとは別に、水溶性樹脂を分散剤として水に添加して攪拌し、水溶性樹脂が溶解した水相を調製した後、水相に油相を添加、攪拌する。
 ここで、水溶性樹脂としては、例えば、ポリビニルアルコール(PVA)、メチルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース等が挙げられる。また、有機溶剤としては、例えば、テトラヒドロフラン、酢酸エチル、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン等が挙げられる。
In the dispersion step, for example, when preparing an emulsion, the compound represented by the general formula (1) is added to a solvent and stirred to prepare an oil phase in which the compound is dissolved. Is added to water as a dispersant and stirred to prepare an aqueous phase in which the water-soluble resin is dissolved, and then the oil phase is added to the aqueous phase and stirred.
Here, examples of the water-soluble resin include polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), methyl cellulose, and hydroxypropyl cellulose. Examples of the organic solvent include tetrahydrofuran, ethyl acetate, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, and the like.
 また、一般式(1)で表される化合物が分散状態で存在していることは、以下に示すエマルション(乳化物)又はサスペンジョンを調製した後、エマルション又はサスペンジョンから有機溶媒を除去した後でも、分散状態が25℃で少なくとも1週間、安定に存在することを目視で確認することができる状態をいう。具体的には、エマルションの調製直後と25℃で少なくとも1週間経過した後の分散粒子の平均粒子径を測定、対比することで確認できる。
 前記エマルションの調製は、一般式(1)で表される化合物20gを100gの有機溶剤(例えばテトラヒドロフラン)に添加して加熱、攪拌し、該化合物が溶解した油相を調製し、これとは別に、ポリビニルアルコール(水溶性樹脂)36gを分散剤として水250gに添加して加熱、攪拌し、PVAが溶解した水相を調製した後、前記水相に前記油相を添加し、攪拌(装置:ディゾルバー、回転数:20000rpm、攪拌時間:10分間、攪拌温度:25℃)することで行なうことができる。
In addition, the presence of the compound represented by the general formula (1) in a dispersed state means that after preparing an emulsion (emulsion) or suspension shown below, after removing an organic solvent from the emulsion or suspension, A state in which the dispersion state can be visually confirmed to exist stably at 25 ° C. for at least one week. Specifically, it can be confirmed by measuring and comparing the average particle diameter of the dispersed particles immediately after the preparation of the emulsion and after at least one week has passed at 25 ° C.
The emulsion is prepared by adding 20 g of the compound represented by the general formula (1) to 100 g of an organic solvent (for example, tetrahydrofuran) and heating and stirring to prepare an oil phase in which the compound is dissolved. After adding 36 g of polyvinyl alcohol (water-soluble resin) to 250 g of water as a dispersant and heating and stirring to prepare a water phase in which PVA is dissolved, the oil phase is added to the water phase and stirring (apparatus: (Dissolver, rotational speed: 20000 rpm, stirring time: 10 minutes, stirring temperature: 25 ° C.).
 前記平均粒子径は、レーザー解析/散乱式粒子径分布測定装置LA950〔(株)堀場製作所製〕によりメジアン径として得られる値である。 The average particle diameter is a value obtained as a median diameter by a laser analysis / scattering particle size distribution measuring apparatus LA950 (manufactured by Horiba, Ltd.).
 本発明における塗布液は、好ましくは、一般式(1)で表される化合物が分散含有されたエマルション(又はサスペンジョン)と、バインダーポリマーと、必要に応じて界面活性剤、架橋剤などの他の成分とを混合することで調製することができる。一般式(1)で表される化合物を分散する際の分散機としては、公知の攪拌機などを用いることができ、例えば、ディゾルバー、ビーズミル、ボールミル、超音波分散機などを用いて好適に行なうことができる。 The coating liquid in the present invention is preferably an emulsion (or suspension) in which the compound represented by the general formula (1) is dispersed and contained, a binder polymer, and other surfactants and crosslinkers as necessary. It can be prepared by mixing the ingredients. As a disperser for dispersing the compound represented by the general formula (1), a known stirrer or the like can be used. For example, a disperser, a bead mill, a ball mill, an ultrasonic disperser or the like is preferably used. Can do.
 塗布液は、塗布溶媒として水を用いた水系でもよいし、トルエンやメチルエチルケトン等の有機溶媒を用いた溶剤系でもよく、前者では、水と水に混和性の有機溶剤との混合溶媒を用いてもよい。中でも、前記塗布液は、環境負荷の観点から水を溶媒とした形態が好ましく、塗布液中に含まれる全溶媒に対して50質量%以上が水である形態がより好ましい。全溶媒中の水の割合は60質量%以上が好ましく、80質量%以上がより好ましい。
 塗布溶媒は、1種類を単独で用いてもよいし、2種類以上を混合して用いてもよい。
The coating solution may be an aqueous system using water as a coating solvent or a solvent system using an organic solvent such as toluene or methyl ethyl ketone. In the former case, a mixed solvent of water and an organic solvent miscible with water is used. Also good. Especially, the form which used water as the solvent for the said coating liquid from a viewpoint of environmental impact is preferable, and the form whose 50 mass% or more is water with respect to all the solvents contained in a coating liquid is more preferable. The proportion of water in the total solvent is preferably 60% by mass or more, and more preferably 80% by mass or more.
A coating solvent may be used individually by 1 type, and may mix and use 2 or more types.
 塗布液を塗布する方法としては、従来公知の塗布方法を適宜選択することができ、例えば、グラビアコーター、バーコーターなどの公知の塗布方法を利用することができる。 As a method for applying the coating solution, a conventionally known coating method can be appropriately selected. For example, a known coating method such as a gravure coater or a bar coater can be used.
(一般式(1)で表される化合物)
 本発明におけるポリマー層形成用の塗布液は、紫外線吸収剤として、下記一般式(1)で表される化合物の少なくとも一種を含有する。この紫外線吸収剤は、従来の紫外線吸収剤に比べて、より長波の紫外線に吸収を持ち、400nm付近の長波紫外線(UV-A)領域を含む広い範囲で紫外線遮蔽効果が得られる。これにより、長期使用時において、従来に比べてより優れた耐光性能が保てる。
(Compound represented by the general formula (1))
The coating solution for forming a polymer layer in the present invention contains at least one compound represented by the following general formula (1) as an ultraviolet absorber. This ultraviolet absorber absorbs longer-wave ultraviolet rays than conventional ultraviolet absorbers, and provides an ultraviolet shielding effect in a wide range including a long-wave ultraviolet (UV-A) region around 400 nm. Thereby, in the long-term use, superior light resistance performance can be maintained as compared with the conventional case.
 前記一般式(1)で表される紫外線吸収剤の、ポリマー層形成用の塗布液中における含有濃度は、塗布液の全質量に対して、3質量%以上9質量%以下が好ましく、3.5質量%以上8.5質量%以下がより好ましい。含有濃度が3質量%以上であることで、良好な塗布面状が得られ、長期に亘って優れた耐光性能を保持し、特に400nm付近の長波紫外線(UV-A)領域を含む広い範囲で紫外線遮蔽効果に優れる。また、含有濃度が10質量%以下であることで、良好な塗布面状が得られ、長期に亘って優れた耐光性能が保持できると共に、ポリマー層としたときのブリードアウトの発生を防ぐことができる。 The content concentration of the ultraviolet absorber represented by the general formula (1) in the coating liquid for forming the polymer layer is preferably 3% by mass or more and 9% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the coating liquid. 5 mass% or more and 8.5 mass% or less are more preferable. When the content concentration is 3% by mass or more, a good coated surface shape is obtained, and excellent light resistance is maintained over a long period of time. In particular, in a wide range including a long wave ultraviolet (UV-A) region around 400 nm. Excellent ultraviolet shielding effect. In addition, when the content concentration is 10% by mass or less, a good coated surface shape can be obtained, and excellent light resistance can be maintained over a long period of time, and the occurrence of bleed out when a polymer layer is formed can be prevented. it can.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

 
 前記一般式(1)において、R1a、R1b、R1c、R1d、及びR1eは、各々独立に、ヒドロキシ基(OH基)を除く1価の置換基を表す。R1a~R1eで表される置換基は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。R1a~R1eで表される置換基の少なくとも1つはハメット則のハメットの置換基定数σp値が0.3以上である基である。 In the general formula (1), R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d , and R 1e each independently represent a monovalent substituent other than a hydroxy group (OH group). The substituents represented by R 1a to R 1e may be bonded to each other to form a ring. At least one of the substituents represented by R 1a to R 1e is a group having a Hammett's Hammett's Hammett's substituent constant σp value of 0.3 or more.
 R1a、R1b、R1c、R1d、R1eで表される置換基は、R1a~R1eの少なくとも1つにおいてハメット則のσp値が0.3以上であれば特に制限はない。ハメット則のσp値が0.3以上の置換基の好ましい例として、アルコキシカルボニル基(COOR)、ニトロ基(NO)、シアノ基(CN)、ハロゲン化アルキル基(フルオロアルキル基(Rf)を含む)、スルホン酸又はそのアルカリ金属塩(SOH又はSOM)を挙げることができる。 The substituent represented by R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d , and R 1e is not particularly limited as long as at least one of R 1a to R 1e has a Hammett's σp value of 0.3 or more. Preferred examples of the substituent having a Hammett's rule σp value of 0.3 or more include an alkoxycarbonyl group (COOR n ), a nitro group (NO 2 ), a cyano group (CN), a halogenated alkyl group (fluoroalkyl group (Rf)). ), Sulfonic acid or an alkali metal salt thereof (SO 3 H or SO 3 M).
 上記において、Rは、アルキル部位を表す。アルコキシカルボニル基のRで表されるアルキル部分の炭素数は1~20の範囲が好ましい。該アルキル部位は、直鎖でも分岐鎖でもよく、さらに二重結合又は三重結合を含んでもよい。中でも、アルキル部分の炭素数は、1~10の範囲がより好ましく、1~5の範囲が更に好ましい。アルコキシカルボニル基の具体例としては、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、n-ブトキシカルボニル基、t-ブトキシカルボニル基等が挙げられる。 In the above, R n represents an alkyl moiety. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl moiety represented by R n of the alkoxycarbonyl group is preferably in the range of 1-20. The alkyl moiety may be linear or branched, and may further contain a double bond or a triple bond. Among these, the carbon number of the alkyl moiety is more preferably in the range of 1 to 10, and further preferably in the range of 1 to 5. Specific examples of the alkoxycarbonyl group include methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, n-butoxycarbonyl group, t-butoxycarbonyl group and the like.
 また、前記ハロゲン化アルキル基は、ハロゲン置換の数に特に制限はなく、任意に選択すればよい。ハロゲンの種類は、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子が好ましく、中でも特にフッ素原子が好ましい。ハロゲン化アルキル基の中でも、フルオロアルキル基が好ましく、更には炭素数1~5のフルオロアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~5のパーフルオロアルキル基が特に好ましい。フルオロアルキル基は、直鎖又は分岐鎖のいずれでもよく、さらに二重結合又は三重結合を含んでもよい。フルオロアルキル基の具体例としては、フルオロメチル基、ジフルオロエチル基、パーフルオロメチル基、ヘキサフルオロプロピル基等が挙げられる。 The halogenated alkyl group is not particularly limited in the number of halogen substitutions, and may be arbitrarily selected. The kind of halogen is preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom, among which a fluorine atom is particularly preferred. Among the halogenated alkyl groups, a fluoroalkyl group is preferable, a fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is particularly preferable. The fluoroalkyl group may be either a straight chain or a branched chain, and may further contain a double bond or a triple bond. Specific examples of the fluoroalkyl group include a fluoromethyl group, a difluoroethyl group, a perfluoromethyl group, and a hexafluoropropyl group.
 前記SOMにおけるMは、アルカリ金属を表す。Mで表されるアルカリ金属としては、リチウム、ナトリウム、又はカリウムが好適に挙げられ、特にナトリウム又はカリウムがより好ましい。 M in the SO 3 M represents an alkali metal. As an alkali metal represented by M, lithium, sodium, or potassium is mentioned suitably, Especially sodium or potassium is more preferable.
 前記一般式(1)における、R1a~R1eで表される置換基が、上記の基以外の1価の基を表す場合、該1価の置換基(以下、「置換基A」とする。)としては、例えば、以下に示す基が挙げられる。すなわち、
 前記置換基Aの具体例として、ハロゲン原子(例えばフッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子)、炭素数1~20のアルキル基(ハロゲン化アルキル基を含む。例えばメチル、エチル、パーフルオロメチル、フルオロエチル)、炭素数6~20のアリール基(例えばフェニル、ナフチル)、シアノ基、カルボキシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基(例えばメトキシカルボニル)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(例えばフェノキシカルボニル)、カルバモイル基(例えばカルバモイル、N-フェニルカルバモイル、N,N-ジメチルカルバモイル)、アルキルカルボニル基(例えばアセチル)、アリールカルボニル基(例えばベンゾイル)、ニトロ基、アミノ基(例えばアミノ、ジメチルアミノ、アニリノ、置換スルホアミノ基)、アシルアミノ基(例えばアセトアミド、エトキシカルボニルアミノ)、スルホンアミド基(例えばメタンスルホンアミド)、イミド基(例えばスクシンイミド、フタルイミド)、イミノ基(例えばベンジリデンアミノ)、ヒドロキシ基(R1a、R1b、R1c、R1d、R1eで表される1価の置換基には含まれない。)、炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基(例えばメトキシ)、アリールオキシ基(例えばフェノキシ)、アシルオキシ基(例えばアセトキシ)、アルキルスルホニルオキシ基(例えばメタンスルホニルオキシ)、アリールスルホニルオキシ基(例えばベンゼンスルホニルオキシ)、スルホ基、スルファモイル基(例えばスルファモイル、N-フェニルスルファモイル)、アルキルチオ基(例えばメチルチオ)、アリールチオ基(例えばフェニルチオ)、チオシアネート基、アルキルスルホニル基(例えばメタンスルホニル)、アリールスルホニル基(例えばベンゼンスルホニル)、炭素数6~20のヘテロ環基(例えばピリジル、モルホリノ)などを挙げることができる。
 前記1価の置換基は、無置換でもよいし、更に置換基で置換されていてもよく、置換基を複数有する場合は該複数の置換基は同じでも異なってもよい。置換基で置換されている場合の置換基の例としては、前記「1価の置換基A」の例として挙げられた各基を挙げることができる。また、置換基同士が結合して環が形成されてもよい。
When the substituent represented by R 1a to R 1e in the general formula (1) represents a monovalent group other than the above-described groups, the monovalent substituent (hereinafter referred to as “substituent A”). .) Includes, for example, the following groups. That is,
Specific examples of the substituent A include a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (including a halogenated alkyl group. For example, methyl, ethyl, perfluoromethyl Fluoroethyl), aryl groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms (eg phenyl, naphthyl), cyano groups, carboxyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups (eg methoxycarbonyl), aryloxycarbonyl groups (eg phenoxycarbonyl), carbamoyl groups (eg carbamoyl) , N-phenylcarbamoyl, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl), alkylcarbonyl group (eg acetyl), arylcarbonyl group (eg benzoyl), nitro group, amino group (eg amino, dimethylamino, anilino, substituted sulfoamino group), acyl Amino group (e.g. acetamido, ethoxycarbonylamino), a sulfonamido group (e.g., methanesulfonamido), an imido group (e.g. succinimido, phthalimido), an imino group (e.g., benzylideneamino), a hydroxy group (R 1a, R 1b, R 1c, Not included in the monovalent substituent represented by R 1d and R 1e ), an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (for example, methoxy), an aryloxy group (for example, phenoxy), an acyloxy group (for example, acetoxy), Alkylsulfonyloxy group (for example, methanesulfonyloxy), arylsulfonyloxy group (for example, benzenesulfonyloxy), sulfo group, sulfamoyl group (for example, sulfamoyl, N-phenylsulfamoyl), alkylthio group (for example, methylthio), arylthio group For example, phenylthio), a thiocyanate group, an alkylsulfonyl group (e.g. methanesulfonyl), an arylsulfonyl group (e.g., benzenesulfonyl), and the like Hajime Tamaki having 6 to 20 carbon atoms (for example, pyridyl, morpholino).
The monovalent substituent may be unsubstituted, may be further substituted with a substituent, and when having a plurality of substituents, the plurality of substituents may be the same or different. Examples of the substituent in the case of being substituted with a substituent include the groups listed as examples of the “monovalent substituent A”. Moreover, substituents may couple | bond together and a ring may be formed.
 置換基同士が結合して形成される前記環としては、ベンゼン環、ピリジン環、ピラジン環、ピリミジン環、トリアジン環、ピリダジン環、ピロール環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、トリアゾール環、オキサゾール環、オキサジアゾール環、チアゾール環、チアジアゾール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、セレノフェン環、シロール環、ゲルモール環、ホスホール環等が挙げられる。 Examples of the ring formed by bonding substituents include benzene ring, pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyrimidine ring, triazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrrole ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, oxazole ring, oxadi Examples thereof include an azole ring, a thiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a selenophene ring, a silole ring, a gelmol ring, and a phosphole ring.
 前記一般式(1)における1価の置換基Aとしては、ハロゲン原子、置換又は無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基(ハロゲン化アルキル基を含む。)、シアノ基、カルボキシル基、置換又は無置換のアルキル部位の炭素数が1~20のアルコキシカルボニル基、置換又は無置換のカルバモイル基、置換又は無置換のアルキル部位の炭素数が1~20のアルキルカルボニル基、ニトロ基、置換又は無置換のアミノ基、ヒドロキシ基(R1a、R1b、R1c、R1d、R1eで表される1価の置換基には含まれない。)、置換又は無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換又は無置換の炭素数6~20のアリールオキシ基、置換又は無置換のスルファモイル基、チオシアネート基、又は置換又は無置換のアルキル部位の炭素数が1~20のアルキルスルホニル基が好ましい。これらの中でも、ヒドロキシ基(R1a、R1b、R1c、R1d、R1eで表される1価の置換基には含まれない。)、炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、炭素数6~20のアリールオキシ基、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、アミド基がより好ましく、ヒドロキシ基(R1a、R1b、R1c、R1d、R1eで表される1価の置換基には含まれない。)、炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、炭素数6~20のアリールオキシ基、炭素数1~20のアルキル基が更に好ましい。
 アルコキシ基のアルキル部位は、炭素数1~20の直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6の直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基が更に好ましい。炭素数1~6の直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基としては、メチル、エチル、n-プロピル、i-プロピル、n-ブチル、i-ブチル、s-ブチル、t-ブチル、n-ペンチル、i-ペンチル、t-ペンチル、n-ヘキシル、i-ヘキシル、t-ヘキシル、n-オクチル、t-オクチル、i-オクチルを挙げることができ、メチル又はエチルが好ましく、メチルが特に好ましい。
As the monovalent substituent A in the general formula (1), a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (including a halogenated alkyl group), a cyano group, a carboxyl group, substituted or unsubstituted An alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in the unsubstituted alkyl moiety, a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in the substituted or unsubstituted alkyl moiety, a nitro group, substituted or unsubstituted A substituted amino group, a hydroxy group (not included in the monovalent substituent represented by R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d , R 1e ), a substituted or unsubstituted C 1-20. An alkoxy group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoyl group, a thiocyanate group, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl moiety having 1 carbon atom Preferred alkylsulfonyl groups of 20. Among these, a hydroxy group (not included in the monovalent substituent represented by R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d , and R 1e ), an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and a carbon number of 6 Are more preferably an aryloxy group having ˜20, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and an amide group, and the monovalent substituent represented by a hydroxy group (R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d , R 1e is Not more preferred), an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms are more preferred.
The alkyl moiety of the alkoxy group is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, i-butyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, i -Pentyl, t-pentyl, n-hexyl, i-hexyl, t-hexyl, n-octyl, t-octyl, i-octyl can be mentioned, methyl or ethyl is preferred, and methyl is particularly preferred.
 前記R1a、R1b、R1c、R1d、R1eのうち、本発明における好ましい第一の態様として、R1a、R1c、R1eのうち少なくとも1つが1価の置換基を表し、該置換基の少なくとも1つがハメット則のσp値が正である置換基を表す態様が挙げられる。中でも、R1cがハメット則のσp値が正である置換基を表す態様がより好ましい。また、R1cがハメット則のσp値が正である置換基であり、R1a、R1b、R1d、R1eが水素原子を表す態様が更に好ましい。R1cがハメット則のσp値が正である置換基を表す場合、電子求引性基によりLUMOが安定化されるため、励起寿命が短くなり、耐光性が向上するため好ましい。 Of the R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d and R 1e , as a preferred first aspect of the present invention, at least one of R 1a , R 1c and R 1e represents a monovalent substituent, There is an embodiment in which at least one of the substituents represents a substituent having a positive Hammett's σp value. Among these, an embodiment in which R 1c represents a substituent having a positive Hammett's σp value is more preferable. Further, it is more preferable that R 1c is a substituent having a positive Hammett's σp value, and R 1a , R 1b , R 1d , and R 1e represent a hydrogen atom. When R 1c represents a substituent having a positive Hammett's σp value, LUMO is stabilized by the electron-attracting group, which is preferable because the excitation lifetime is shortened and the light resistance is improved.
 第一の態様においては、一般式(1)中のR1a、R1c、R1eにおける「ハメット則のσp値が正である置換基」としては、好ましくはσp値が0.1~1.2の電子求引性基である。σp値が0.1以上の電子求引性基の具体例としては、COOR(Rは、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、好ましくは水素原子、アルキル基であり、より好ましくは水素原子である。)、CONR (Rは、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表す。)、CN、ハロゲン原子、NO、SOM(Mは、水素原子又はアルカリ金属を表す。)、アシル基、ホルミル基、アシルオキシ基、アシルチオ基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、ジアルキルホスホノ基、ジアリールホスホノ基、ジアルキルホスフィニル基、ジアリールホスフィニル基、ホスホリル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アシルチオ基、スルファモイル基、チオシアネート基、チオカルボニル基、イミノ基、N原子で置換されたイミノ基、カルボキシル基(又はその塩)、少なくとも2つ以上のハロゲン原子で置換されたアルキル基(例えばCF)、少なくとも2つ以上のハロゲン原子で置換されたアルコキシ基、少なくとも2つ以上のハロゲン原子で置換されたアリールオキシ基、アシルアミノ基、少なくとも2つ以上のハロゲン原子で置換されたアルキルアミノ基、少なくとも2つ以上のハロゲン原子で置換されたアルキルチオ基、σp値が0.2以上の他の電子求引性基で置換されたアリール基、ヘテロ環基、ハロゲン原子、アゾ基、セレノシアネート基などが挙げられる。
 ハメットのσp値については、Hansch, C.; Leo, A.; Taft, R. W . Chem. Rev. 1991, 91, 165-195に詳しく記載されている。
In the first aspect, the “substituent in which the Hammett's σp value is positive” in R 1a , R 1c , and R 1e in the general formula (1) preferably has a σp value of 0.1 to 1. 2 electron withdrawing groups. As specific examples of the electron withdrawing group having a σp value of 0.1 or more, COOR r (R r represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably CONR s 2 (R s represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent), CN, halogen atom, NO 2 , SO 3 M (M represents a hydrogen atom or an alkali metal). .), Acyl group, formyl group, acyloxy group, acylthio group, alkyloxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, dialkylphosphono group, diarylphosphono group, dialkylphosphinyl group, diarylphosphinyl group, phosphoryl group, Alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, acylthio group, sulfamoyl group, thiocyanate group, thiocarbonyl group, imino group, N atom An imino group substituted with a child, a carboxyl group (or a salt thereof), an alkyl group substituted with at least two or more halogen atoms (for example, CF 3 ), an alkoxy group substituted with at least two or more halogen atoms, at least An aryloxy group substituted with two or more halogen atoms, an acylamino group, an alkylamino group substituted with at least two halogen atoms, an alkylthio group substituted with at least two halogen atoms, or a σp value of 0 And aryl groups, heterocyclic groups, halogen atoms, azo groups, and selenocyanate groups substituted with two or more other electron-withdrawing groups.
Hammett σp values are described in detail in Hansch, C .; Leo, A .; Taft, R. W. Chem. Rev. 1991, 91, 165-195.
 前記「ハメット則のσp値が正である置換基」としては、優れた耐光性と溶解性を有する観点から、より好ましくはCOOR、CONR 、CN、CF、ハロゲン原子、NO、及びSOMから選択される。ここで、R及びRは、各々独立に、水素原子、又は1価の置換基を表す。Mは、水素原子又はアルカリ金属を表す(Mに関して以下同様である)。)。この中でも、「ハメット則のσp値が正である置換基」は、上記同様の理由から、COOR又はCNが更に好ましく、COORが特に好ましい。 The “substituent having a positive Hammett's σp value” is more preferably COOR r , CONR s 2 , CN, CF 3 , a halogen atom, NO 2 , from the viewpoint of excellent light resistance and solubility. And SO 3 M. Here, R r and R s each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. M represents a hydrogen atom or an alkali metal (the same applies to M hereinafter). ). Among them, the “substituent having a positive Hammett's σp value” is more preferably COOR r or CN, and particularly preferably COOR r for the same reason as above.
 前記R、Rは、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、ここでの1価の置換基としては前記置換基Aを挙げることができる。中でも、炭素数1~20の直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6の直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基がより好ましい。炭素数1~6の直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル、エチル、n-プロピル、i-プロピル、n-ブチル、i-ブチル、s-ブチル、t-ブチル、n-ペンチル、i-ペンチル、t-ペンチル、n-ヘキシル、i-ヘキシル、t-ヘキシル、n-オクチル、t-オクチル、i-オクチルを挙げることができ、メチル又はエチルが好ましく、メチルが特に好ましい。
 また、前記Mで表されるアルカリ金属としては、リチウム、ナトリウム、又はカリウムが挙げられ、特にナトリウム、カリウムが好ましい(以下、Mについて同様である)。
R r and R s each represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and examples of the monovalent substituent herein include the substituent A. Of these, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable. Examples of the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, i-butyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, and n-pentyl. , I-pentyl, t-pentyl, n-hexyl, i-hexyl, t-hexyl, n-octyl, t-octyl, i-octyl, methyl or ethyl is preferable, and methyl is particularly preferable.
Examples of the alkali metal represented by M include lithium, sodium, and potassium, and sodium and potassium are particularly preferable (hereinafter the same applies to M).
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物において、R1cがCOOR、CONR 、CN、CF、ハロゲン原子、NO、SOMのいずれかである態様が好ましく、更には、COOR又はCNである態様がより好ましく、CNである態様が更に好ましい。 In the compound represented by the general formula (1), it is preferable that R 1c is any one of COOR r , CONR s 2 , CN, CF 3 , a halogen atom, NO 2 , SO 3 M, and further, COOR The aspect which is r or CN is more preferable, and the aspect which is CN is still more preferable.
 前記一般式(1)において、R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n、及びR1pは、各々独立に、水素原子、又は1価の置換基を表し、該置換基は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。 In the general formula (1), R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n , and R 1p each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, The substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
 R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n及びR1pが1価の置換基を表す場合、R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n及びR1pの少なくとも1つが、前記「ハメット則のσp値が正である置換基」を表すことが好ましく、R1g、R1h、R1i及びR1jの少なくとも1つが、前記「ハメット則のσp値が正(好ましくは0.1~1.2)である置換基」を表すことがより好ましく、更には、R1hが前記「ハメット則のσp値が正である置換基」を表すことが更に好ましい。 When R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p represent a monovalent substituent, R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p preferably represent the “substituent having a positive Hammett σp value”, and at least one of R 1g , R 1h , R 1i and R 1j It is more preferable that the σp value of the rule is positive (preferably 0.1 to 1.2) ”, and R 1h represents the“ substituent whose σp value of the Hammett rule is positive ”. More preferably, it represents.
 本発明においては、優れた耐光性を示す点で、R1n及びR1hが前記「ハメット則のσp値が正(好ましくは0.1~1.2)である置換基」を表す場合が特に好ましい。 In the present invention, particularly when R 1n and R 1h represent the above-mentioned “substituents whose Hammett's σp value is positive (preferably 0.1 to 1.2)” in view of excellent light resistance. preferable.
 また、本発明において、優れた耐光性を示す点で、R1h又はR1nが、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、COOR、CONR 、CN、CF、ハロゲン原子、NO、SOMのいずれかであることが好ましく、R1h又はR1nが水素原子であることがより好ましく、R1h及びR1nが水素原子であることが更に好ましく、R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n及びR1pが水素原子を表すことが特に好ましい。 In the present invention, R 1h or R 1n is independently a hydrogen atom, COOR r , CONR s 2 , CN, CF 3 , halogen atom, NO 2 , SO 3 M, or the like, in that it exhibits excellent light resistance. R 1h or R 1n is preferably a hydrogen atom, R 1h and R 1n are more preferably a hydrogen atom, and R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p particularly preferably represent a hydrogen atom.
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物において、優れた耐光性を示す点で、R1cが「ハメット則のσp値が正(好ましくは0.1~1.2)である置換基」であって、R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n及びR1pが水素原子である場合が好ましく、R1cがCOOR、CONR 、CN、CF、ハロゲン原子、NO、又はSOMのいずれかであって、R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n及びR1pが水素原子である場合がより好ましい。 In the compound represented by the general formula (1), R 1c is “a substituent having a positive Hammett's σp value (preferably 0.1 to 1.2)” in that it exhibits excellent light resistance. R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p are preferably hydrogen atoms, and R 1c is COOR r , CONR s 2 , CN, CF 3 , More preferably, it is any one of a halogen atom, NO 2 , and SO 3 M, and R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n, and R 1p are hydrogen atoms.
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物は、pKaが-5.0~-7.0の範囲であることが好ましく、-5.2~-6.5の範囲であることがより好ましく、-5.4~-6.0の範囲であることが更に好ましい。 The compound represented by the general formula (1) preferably has a pKa in the range of −5.0 to −7.0, more preferably in the range of −5.2 to −6.5. More preferably, it is in the range of -5.4 to -6.0.
 また、本発明における好ましい第二の態様として、R1a、R1c及びR1eが水素原子を表し、R1b及びR1dが、各々独立に1価の置換基を表し、R1b及びR1dの少なくとも1つはハメット則のσp値が正である置換基である態様を挙げることができる。これにより、一般式(1)で表される化合物は、特に溶剤溶解性が優れる。ポリマーとの相溶性(特にポリエステルとの相溶性に優れることから、該化合物を含むポリエステル樹脂組成物としたときには、一般式(1)で表される化合物の析出又はブリードアウトが発生し難くいものとする効果を有する。
 ここで、溶剤溶解性とは、酢酸エチル、メチルエチルケトン、トルエンなどの有機溶剤への溶解性を意味する。ポリマーとの相溶性(特にポリエステルとの相溶性)の点で、使用する溶剤に対して10質量%以上溶解することが好ましく、30質量%以上溶解することがより好ましい。
As a preferred second embodiment of the present invention, R 1a , R 1c and R 1e each represent a hydrogen atom, R 1b and R 1d each independently represent a monovalent substituent, and R 1b and R 1d An embodiment in which at least one is a substituent having a positive Hammett's σp value can be given. Thereby, especially the compound represented by General formula (1) is excellent in solvent solubility. Compatibility with polymer (especially because of excellent compatibility with polyester, when a polyester resin composition containing the compound is used, precipitation or bleeding out of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is difficult to occur. It has the effect.
Here, the solvent solubility means solubility in an organic solvent such as ethyl acetate, methyl ethyl ketone, and toluene. In terms of compatibility with the polymer (particularly compatibility with the polyester), it is preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, based on the solvent used.
 第二の態様においては、前記一般式(1)中のR1b及びR1dにおける「ハメット則のσp値が正である置換基」としては、好ましくはCOOR、CONR 、CN、CF、ハロゲン原子、NO、及びSOMから選択される。ここで、R及びRは、各々独立に、水素原子、又は1価の置換基を表す。Mは、水素原子又はアルカリ金属を表す。R、Rで表される1価の置換基としては、既述の置換基Aを挙げることができる。
 中でも、アルコキシカルボニル基、ニトロ基、シアノ基、フルオロアルキル基、及びスルホン酸もしくはそのアルカリ金属塩が好ましい。
In the second aspect, the “substituent having a positive Hammett's σp value” in R 1b and R 1d in the general formula (1) is preferably COOR r , CONR s 2 , CN, CF 3. , A halogen atom, NO 2 , and SO 3 M. Here, R r and R s each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. M represents a hydrogen atom or an alkali metal. Examples of the monovalent substituent represented by R r and R s include the substituent A described above.
Among these, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a nitro group, a cyano group, a fluoroalkyl group, and a sulfonic acid or an alkali metal salt thereof are preferable.
 前記「ハメット則のσp値が正である置換基」としては、優れた耐光性と溶解性を示す点で、より好ましくはCOOR又はシアノ基であり、更にはCOORであることが好ましい。「ハメット則のσp値が正である置換基」がシアノ基である場合は、より優れた耐光性を示し、また「ハメット則のσp値が正である置換基」がCOORである場合は、より優れた溶剤溶解性を示す。 As the "substituent σp value of Hammett's rule is positive" is a point showing the solubility and excellent light resistance, more preferably COOR r or a cyano group, it is preferably further is COOR r. When the “substituent having a positive Hammett's σp value” is a cyano group, it exhibits better light resistance, and when the “substituent having a positive Hammett's σp value” is COOR r , Better solvent solubility.
 Rは、水素原子又はアルキル基を表すことが好ましく、炭素数1~20の直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数1~15の直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基が更に好ましい。また、Rは、溶媒に対する溶解性の観点からは、炭素数5~15の分岐鎖のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 分岐鎖のアルキル基は、2級炭素原子又は3級炭素原子を有し、2級炭素原子又は3級炭素原子を1~5個含むことが好ましく、1~3個含むことが好ましく、1又は2個含むことが好ましく、2級炭素原子及び3級炭素原子を1又は2個含むことがより好ましい。また、不斉炭素を1~3個含むことが好ましい。
 Rは、溶媒に対する溶解性の観点からは、2級炭素原子及び3級炭素原子を1又は2個含み、不斉炭素を1又は2個含む炭素数5~15の分岐鎖のアルキル基であることが特に好ましい。
 これは、化合物構造の対称性が崩れ、溶解性が向上するためである。
R r preferably represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms. . R r is more preferably a branched alkyl group having 5 to 15 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of solubility in a solvent.
The branched alkyl group has a secondary carbon atom or a tertiary carbon atom, preferably contains 1 to 5 secondary carbon atoms or tertiary carbon atoms, preferably contains 1 to 3, preferably 1 or It is preferable to include two, and it is more preferable to include one or two secondary carbon atoms and tertiary carbon atoms. Further, it preferably contains 1 to 3 asymmetric carbons.
From the viewpoint of solubility in a solvent, R r is a branched alkyl group having 5 to 15 carbon atoms containing 1 or 2 secondary carbon atoms and tertiary carbon atoms and 1 or 2 asymmetric carbon atoms. It is particularly preferred.
This is because the symmetry of the compound structure is lost and the solubility is improved.
 一方、紫外線吸収能の観点からは、炭素数1~6の直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基がより好ましい。炭素数1~6の直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基としては、メチル、エチル、n-プロピル、i-プロピル、n-ブチル、i-ブチル、s-ブチル、t-ブチル、n-ペンチル、i-ペンチル、t-ペンチル、n-ヘキシル、i-ヘキシル、t-ヘキシル、n-オクチル、t-オクチル、i-オクチルを挙げることができ、メチル又はエチルが好ましく、メチルが特に好ましい。 On the other hand, from the viewpoint of ultraviolet absorbing ability, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable. Examples of the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, i-butyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, i -Pentyl, t-pentyl, n-hexyl, i-hexyl, t-hexyl, n-octyl, t-octyl, i-octyl can be mentioned, methyl or ethyl is preferred, and methyl is particularly preferred.
 また、本発明において、優れた耐光性を示す点で、R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n及びR1pが1価の置換基を表す場合は、R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n及びR1pの少なくとも1つが前記「ハメット則のσp値が正である置換基」を表すことがより好ましく、R1g、R1h、R1i及びR1jの少なくとも1つが前記「ハメット則のσp値が正(好ましくは0.1~1.2)である置換基」を表すことがより好ましく、R1hが前記「ハメット則のσp値が正である置換基」を表すことが更に好ましい。R1b又はR1d、及びR1hが前記「ハメット則のσp値が正(好ましくは0.1~1.2)である置換基」を表すことが特に好ましい。
 本発明において、優れた耐光性を示す点で、R1h又はR1nがそれぞれ独立に水素原子、COOR、CONR 、シアノ基、CF、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、SOMのいずれかであることが好ましく、R1h又はR1nが水素原子であることがより好ましく、R1h及びR1nが水素原子であることが更に好ましく、R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n及びR1pが水素原子を表すことが特に好ましい。
In the present invention, when R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p represent a monovalent substituent in terms of exhibiting excellent light resistance, More preferably, at least one of 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p represents the above-mentioned “substituent with a positive Hammett σp value”, R 1g , More preferably, at least one of R 1h , R 1i and R 1j represents the “substituent whose Hammett's σp value is positive (preferably 0.1 to 1.2)”, and R 1h represents the “Hammett More preferably, it represents a “substituent whose σp value of the rule is positive”. It is particularly preferable that R 1b or R 1d and R 1h represent the above-mentioned “substituents whose Hammett's σp value is positive (preferably 0.1 to 1.2)”.
In the present invention, R 1h or R 1n is independently any one of a hydrogen atom, COOR r , CONR s 2 , a cyano group, CF 3 , a halogen atom, a nitro group, and SO 3 M in that excellent light resistance is exhibited. R 1h or R 1n is preferably a hydrogen atom, R 1h and R 1n are more preferably a hydrogen atom, and R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k R 1m , R 1n and R 1p particularly preferably represent a hydrogen atom.
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物においては、優れた耐光性を示す点で、R1b、R1c又はR1dが「ハメット則のσp値が正(好ましくは0.1~1.2)である置換基」であって、R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n及びR1pが水素原子である場合が好ましく、R1b、R1c又はR1dがCOOR、CONR 、シアノ基、CF、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、又はSOMのいずれかであって、R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n及びR1pが水素原子である場合がより好ましい。
 特に好ましくは、R1a、R1b、R1d、R1e、R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n、及びR1pが水素原子であり、R1cがCOOR〔Rは1価の置換基を表す。〕である。
In the compound represented by the general formula (1), R 1b , R 1c or R 1d is “a Hammett's σp value is positive (preferably 0.1 to 1.2). It is preferable that R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n and R 1p are hydrogen atoms, and R 1b , R 1c or R 1d Is one of COOR r , CONR s 2 , cyano group, CF 3 , halogen atom, nitro group, or SO 3 M, and R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R More preferably, 1n and R 1p are hydrogen atoms.
Particularly preferably, R 1a , R 1b , R 1d , R 1e , R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n , and R 1p are hydrogen atoms, and R 1c is COOR r [R r represents a monovalent substituent. ].
 以下、前記一般式(1)で表される化合物の具体例(例示化合物1~120、m-1~m-70)を示す。但し、本発明は、これらに限定されるものではない。なお、下記の具体例において、Meはメチル基を、Phはフェニル基を、-C13はn-ヘキシルをそれぞれ表す。 Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (1) (Exemplary compounds 1 to 120, m-1 to m-70) are shown below. However, the present invention is not limited to these. In the following specific examples, Me represents a methyl group, Ph represents a phenyl group, and —C 6 H 13 represents n-hexyl.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

 
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物は、構造とその置かれた環境によって互変異性体を取り得るが、一般式(1)で表される化合物には、互変異性体も含まれる。 The compound represented by the general formula (1) can take a tautomer depending on the structure and the environment in which the compound is placed, but the compound represented by the general formula (1) includes a tautomer. .
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物は、同位元素(例えば、H、H、13C、15N、17O、18Oなど)を含有していてもよい。 The compound represented by the general formula (1) may contain an isotope (for example, 2 H, 3 H, 13 C, 15 N, 17 O, 18 O, etc.).
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物は、任意の方法で合成することができる。
 例えば、公知の特許文献や非特許文献(例えば、特開平7-188190号公報、特開平11-315072号公報、特開2001-220385号公報や、「染料と薬品」第40巻12号(1995)の325~339ページなど)を参照して合成することができる。具体的には、前記例示化合物(16)は、サリチルアミドと3,5-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)ベンゾイルクロリドと2-ヒドロキシベンズアミジン塩酸塩とを反応させることにより合成できる。また、サリチルアミドとサリチル酸と3,5-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)ベンズアミジン塩酸塩とを反応させることによっても合成できる。
The compound represented by the general formula (1) can be synthesized by any method.
For example, known patent documents and non-patent documents (for example, JP-A-7-188190, JP-A-11-315072, JP-A-2001-220385, “Dye and Drug”, Vol. 40, No. 12 (1995) ), Pages 325 to 339) and the like. Specifically, the exemplified compound (16) can be synthesized by reacting salicylamide, 3,5-bis (trifluoromethyl) benzoyl chloride and 2-hydroxybenzamidine hydrochloride. Alternatively, it can be synthesized by reacting salicylamide, salicylic acid and 3,5-bis (trifluoromethyl) benzamidine hydrochloride.
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物は、有機溶媒に対する溶解性に優れるという特徴を有すると共に、構造式中の特定位置に「ハメット則のσp値が正である置換基」を有するため、電子求引性基によりLUMOが安定化されるため、励起寿命が短くなり、優れた耐光性を有している。したがって、紫外線吸収剤として用いた場合に、トリアジン系化合物等の従来より用いられている紫外線吸収剤では高濃度で含有すると析出や長期使用によるブリードアウトが生じたり或いは分解で黄変する等の悪影響を生じ易いが、本発明における既述の一般式(1)で表される化合物は優れた溶解性と耐光性を有するため、高濃度で含有する場合でも析出やブリードアウトが生じず、長時間使用した場合でも分解せず黄変を防ぐことができる。 The compound represented by the general formula (1) has a feature of excellent solubility in an organic solvent, and has a “substituent having a positive Hammett's σp value” at a specific position in the structural formula. Since LUMO is stabilized by the electron withdrawing group, the excitation life is shortened and the light resistance is excellent. Therefore, when used as a UV absorber, conventional UV absorbers such as triazine compounds, when used at a high concentration, have adverse effects such as precipitation, bleeding out due to long-term use, or yellowing due to decomposition. However, since the compound represented by the general formula (1) in the present invention has excellent solubility and light resistance, precipitation and bleed-out do not occur even when it is contained at a high concentration, and it takes a long time. Even when used, yellowing can be prevented without decomposition.
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物は、一種のみ用いてもよく、異なる構造を有する二種以上を併用することもできる。 The compound represented by the general formula (1) may be used alone or in combination of two or more having different structures.
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物の極大吸収波長は、特に限定されないが、好ましくは250~400nmであり、より好ましくは280~380nmである。半値幅は、好ましくは20~100nmであり、より好ましくは40~80nmである。
 前記極大吸収波長及び半値幅は、従来公知の方法により容易に測定される値である。測定方法に関しては、例えば日本化学会編「第4版実験化学講座7分光II」(丸善,1992年)180~186ページなどに記載されている。具体的には、適当な溶媒に試料を溶解し、石英製又はガラス製のセルを用いて試料用と対照用の2つのセルを使用し、分光光度計によって測定される。溶媒としては、試料の溶解性に合わせて、測定波長領域に吸収を持たないこと、溶質分子との相互作用が小さいこと、揮発性があまり著しくないこと等が求められる。本発明における極大吸収波長及び半値幅は、酢酸エチルを用いて濃度約5×10-5mol・dm-3の溶液を調製し、光路長10mmの石英セルで測定される値である。
The maximum absorption wavelength of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is not particularly limited, but is preferably 250 to 400 nm, and more preferably 280 to 380 nm. The full width at half maximum is preferably 20 to 100 nm, more preferably 40 to 80 nm.
The maximum absorption wavelength and the full width at half maximum are values easily measured by a conventionally known method. The measurement method is described in, for example, “The Fourth Edition Experimental Chemistry Course 7 Spectroscopy II” (Maruzen, 1992), pages 180 to 186, edited by the Chemical Society of Japan. Specifically, the sample is dissolved in an appropriate solvent, and measurement is performed by a spectrophotometer using two cells for sample and control using a cell made of quartz or glass. The solvent is required to have no absorption in the measurement wavelength region, have a small interaction with the solute molecule, and have a very low volatility in accordance with the solubility of the sample. The maximum absorption wavelength and half width in the present invention are values measured by preparing a solution having a concentration of about 5 × 10 −5 mol · dm −3 using ethyl acetate and using a quartz cell having an optical path length of 10 mm.
 スペクトルの半値幅に関しては、例えば日本化学会編「第4版実験化学講座3 基本操作III」(丸善、1991年)154ページなどに記載がある。なお、成書では波数目盛りで横軸を取った例で半値幅の説明がなされる場合があるが、本発明における半値幅は波長目盛りで軸を取った場合の値を用いる。半値幅の単位は[nm]である。具体的には、極大吸収波長における吸光度の1/2の吸収帯の幅を表し、吸収スペクトルの形を表す値として用いられる。半値幅が小さいスペクトルはシャープなスペクトルを示し、半値幅が大きいスペクトルはブロードなスペクトルを示す。ブロードなスペクトルを与える紫外線吸収化合物は、極大吸収波長から長波側の幅広い領域にも吸収を有するので、黄色味着色がなく、長波紫外線領域を効果的に遮蔽するためには、半値幅が小さいスペクトルを有する紫外線吸収化合物の方が好ましい。 The half width of the spectrum is described in, for example, “Chapter 4 of Experimental Chemistry Lecture 3, Basic Operation III” (Maruzen, 1991), page 154, edited by the Chemical Society of Japan. In the written book, the half width may be explained with an example in which the horizontal axis is taken on the wave number scale, but the half width in the present invention uses a value obtained on the axis on the wavelength scale. The unit of the half width is [nm]. Specifically, it represents the width of the absorption band that is half the absorbance at the maximum absorption wavelength, and is used as a value that represents the shape of the absorption spectrum. A spectrum with a small half-value width shows a sharp spectrum, and a spectrum with a large half-value width shows a broad spectrum. UV-absorbing compounds that give a broad spectrum also have absorption in a wide range from the maximum absorption wavelength to the long wave side, so there is no yellowish coloration, and a spectrum with a small half-value width is effective for shielding the long wave ultraviolet region. A UV-absorbing compound having is preferred.
 光の吸収の強さ、すなわち振動子強度は、時田澄男著「化学セミナー9 カラーケミストリー」(丸善、1982年)154~155ページに記載されるように、モル吸光係数の積分に比例し、吸収スペクトルの対称性がよいときは、振動子強度は極大吸収波長における吸光度と半値幅の積に比例する(但し、この場合の半値幅は波長目盛りで軸を取った値である)。このことは遷移モーメントの値が同じとした場合、半値幅が小さいスペクトルを有する化合物は極大吸収波長における吸光度が大きくなることを意味している。このような紫外線吸収化合物は少量使用するだけで極大吸収波長周辺の領域を効果的に遮蔽できるメリットがあるが、波長が極大吸収波長から少し離れると急激に吸光度が減少するために、幅広い領域を遮蔽することができない。 The intensity of light absorption, that is, oscillator strength, is proportional to the integral of the molar extinction coefficient, as described in Sumida Tokita “Chemical Seminar 9 Color Chemistry” (Maruzen, 1982), pages 154 to 155. When the symmetry of the spectrum is good, the oscillator strength is proportional to the product of the absorbance at the maximum absorption wavelength and the full width at half maximum (however, the full width at half maximum is a value centered on the wavelength scale). This means that when the transition moment values are the same, a compound having a spectrum with a small half width has a large absorbance at the maximum absorption wavelength. Such UV-absorbing compounds have the advantage of being able to effectively shield the area around the maximum absorption wavelength with a small amount of use, but since the absorbance decreases sharply when the wavelength is slightly away from the maximum absorption wavelength, a wide range of areas can be used. It cannot be shielded.
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物は、極大吸収波長におけるモル吸光係数が20000以上であることが好ましく、30000以上であることがより好ましく、50000以上であることが特に好ましい。モル吸光係数が20000以上であると、前記一般式(1)で表される化合物の質量当たりの吸収効率が高いため、紫外線領域を完全に吸収するのに要する「一般式(1)で表される化合物」の量を低減できる。これは、皮膚刺激性や生体内への蓄積を防ぐ観点、及びブリードアウトが生じにくい点から好ましい。
 なお、モル吸光係数については、例えば日本化学会編「新版実験化学講座9 分析化学[II]」(丸善、1977年)244ページなどに記載されており、極大吸収波長及び半値幅を求める際に合わせて求めることができる。
The compound represented by the general formula (1) preferably has a molar extinction coefficient at the maximum absorption wavelength of 20000 or more, more preferably 30000 or more, and particularly preferably 50000 or more. When the molar extinction coefficient is 20000 or more, the absorption efficiency per mass of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is high, and therefore, it is represented by the “general formula (1) required to completely absorb the ultraviolet region. The amount of “compound” can be reduced. This is preferable from the viewpoint of preventing skin irritation and accumulation in a living body and from the point that bleeding out hardly occurs.
The molar extinction coefficient is described in, for example, “New Edition Experimental Chemistry Course 9 Analytical Chemistry [II]” (Maruzen, 1977), page 244, edited by the Chemical Society of Japan. It can be obtained together.
 前記一般式(1)で表される紫外線吸収剤の、形成されたポリマー層中における含有量は、0.15~5.0g/mが好ましく、0.3~4.0g/mがより好ましい。含有量が0.15g/m以上であることで、400nm付近の長波紫外線(UV-A)領域を含む広い範囲で紫外線遮蔽効果に優れる。また、含有量が5.0g/m以下であることで、ブリードアウトの発生を防ぐことができる。 The content of the ultraviolet absorber represented by the general formula (1) in the formed polymer layer is preferably 0.15 to 5.0 g / m 2 , and preferably 0.3 to 4.0 g / m 2. More preferred. When the content is 0.15 g / m 2 or more, the ultraviolet shielding effect is excellent in a wide range including a long-wave ultraviolet (UV-A) region near 400 nm. Moreover, generation | occurrence | production of bleed-out can be prevented because content is 5.0 g / m < 2 > or less.
 本発明におけるポリマー層形成用の塗布液は、紫外線吸収剤として異なる構造を有する2種以上の前記一般式(1)で表される化合物を含有してもよい。また、前記一般式(1)で表される化合物とそれ以外の1種以上の他の紫外線吸収剤とを併用してもよい。基本骨格構造の異なる2種(好ましくは3種)の紫外線吸収剤を併用すると、紫外線吸収剤の分散状態が安定化すると共に、広い波長領域の紫外線を吸収することができる。
 一般式(1)以外の他の紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、トリアジン系、ベンゾトリアゾール系、ベンゾフェノン系、メロシアニン系、シアニン系、ジベンゾイルメタン系、桂皮酸系、シアノアクリレート系、安息香酸エステル系などの化合物が挙げられる。具体的には、ファインケミカル(2004年5月号、28~38ページ)、「高分子用機能性添加剤の新展開」(東レリサーチセンター調査研究部門発行、96~140ページ、1999年)、「高分子添加剤の開発と環境対策」(大勝靖一監修、シーエムシー出版、54~64ページ、2003年)などに記載の紫外線吸収剤が挙げられる。
The coating solution for forming a polymer layer in the present invention may contain two or more compounds represented by the general formula (1) having different structures as an ultraviolet absorber. Moreover, you may use together the compound represented by the said General formula (1), and 1 or more types of other ultraviolet absorbers other than that. When two types (preferably three types) of ultraviolet absorbers having different basic skeleton structures are used in combination, the dispersion state of the ultraviolet absorber is stabilized and ultraviolet rays in a wide wavelength region can be absorbed.
Examples of other ultraviolet absorbers other than the general formula (1) include triazine, benzotriazole, benzophenone, merocyanine, cyanine, dibenzoylmethane, cinnamic acid, cyanoacrylate, and benzoate. And the like. Specifically, fine chemicals (May 2004 issue, pages 28-38), “New development of functional additives for polymers” (published by Toray Research Center, Research Division, pages 96-140, 1999), “ Examples include ultraviolet absorbers described in “Development of Polymer Additives and Environmental Measures” (supervised by Junichi Daikatsu, CMC Publishing, pages 54 to 64, 2003).
 前記他の紫外線吸収剤としては、ベンゾトリアゾール系化合物、ベンゾフェノン系化合物、サリチル酸系化合物、ベンゾオキサジノン系化合物、シアノアクリレート系化合物、ベンゾオキサゾール系化合物、メロシアニン系化合物、トリアジン系化合物である。より好ましくはベンゾオキサジノン系化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール系化合物、ベンゾフェノン系化合物、トリアジン系化合物等が挙げられる。特に好ましくは、ベンゾオキサジノン系化合物である。他の紫外線吸収剤は、特開2008-273950号公報の段落番号〔0117〕~〔0121〕に詳細な記載があり、同公報に記載の材料を適用できる。
 他の紫外線吸収剤を併用する場合、他の紫外線吸収剤の含有比率は、本発明の効果を損なわないように保つ観点から、一般式(1)で表される紫外線吸収剤の量に対して20質量%以下が好ましい。
Examples of the other ultraviolet absorbers include benzotriazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, salicylic acid compounds, benzoxazinone compounds, cyanoacrylate compounds, benzoxazole compounds, merocyanine compounds, and triazine compounds. More preferred are benzoxazinone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, triazine compounds and the like. Particularly preferred are benzoxazinone compounds. Other ultraviolet absorbers are described in detail in paragraphs [0117] to [0121] of JP-A-2008-273950, and the materials described in the publication can be applied.
When other ultraviolet absorbers are used in combination, the content ratio of the other ultraviolet absorbers is based on the amount of the ultraviolet absorber represented by the general formula (1) from the viewpoint of maintaining the effects of the present invention. 20 mass% or less is preferable.
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物は、ベンゾオキサジノン系化合物と組み合わせて含有することが好ましい。一般式(1)で表される化合物は、長波長領域において優れた耐光性を有するため、より長波長領域まで遮蔽可能なベンゾオキサジノンの劣化を防ぐという効果を奏し、ベンゾオキサジノン系化合物と共に用いることで、より長波長領域まで長時間において遮蔽効果が持続できるため好ましい。 The compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably contained in combination with a benzoxazinone compound. Since the compound represented by the general formula (1) has excellent light resistance in the long wavelength region, it has the effect of preventing the deterioration of benzoxazinone that can be shielded to a longer wavelength region, together with the benzoxazinone-based compound. Use is preferable because the shielding effect can be sustained for a long time up to a longer wavelength region.
 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物を紫外線吸収剤として含有することで高い紫外線遮蔽効果が得られるが、更には、隠蔽力の強い白色顔料、例えば酸化チタンなどを併用してもよい。
 また、外観、色調の観点あるいは好みにより、微量(0.05質量%以下)の着色剤を併用してもよい。また、透明あるいは白色であることが重要である用途では、蛍光増白剤を併用してもよい。蛍光増白剤としては市販のものや特開2002-53824号公報に記載の一般式[1]や具体的化合物例1~35などが挙げられる。
By containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) as an ultraviolet absorber, a high ultraviolet shielding effect can be obtained, and furthermore, a white pigment having a strong hiding power, such as titanium oxide, may be used in combination.
Further, a slight amount (0.05% by mass or less) of a colorant may be used in combination depending on the viewpoint of appearance, color tone or preference. In applications where it is important to be transparent or white, a fluorescent brightener may be used in combination. Examples of the fluorescent brightening agent include commercially available products, general formula [1] described in JP-A-2002-53824, and specific compound examples 1 to 35.
(バインダーポリマー)
 本発明におけるポリマー層形成用の塗布液は、バインダーポリマーの少なくとも一種を含有する。バインダーポリマーを前記一般式(1)で表される化合物と共に同一層内に存在させることにより、バインダーポリマーと一般式(1)で表される化合物とを別層に分けて含有させる場合に比べ、一般式(1)で表される化合物がポリマーで包まれた状態が形成され、該化合物自体の劣化を防ぐことができる。
(Binder polymer)
The coating solution for forming a polymer layer in the present invention contains at least one binder polymer. By allowing the binder polymer and the compound represented by the general formula (1) to be present in the same layer together with the binder polymer and the compound represented by the general formula (1) in separate layers, A state in which the compound represented by the general formula (1) is wrapped with a polymer is formed, and deterioration of the compound itself can be prevented.
 バインダーポリマーとしては、例えば、シリコーン系ポリマー(例えば、シリコーンとアクリルの複合ポリマー、シリコーンとポリエステルの複合ポリマー等)、ポリエステル系ポリマー(例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)、ポリエチレン-2,6-ナフタレート(PEN)等のポリエステル)、ポリウレタン系ポリマー(例えば、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート又はトルエンジイソシアネートとエチレングリコール又はプロピレングリコールからなるポリマー等)、アクリル系ポリマー(例えば、ホリメチルメタクリレート、ポリエチルアクリレート等を含有するポリマー)、ポリオレフィン系ポリマー(例えば、ポリエチレンとアクリル酸又はメタクリル酸からなるポリマー等)等の公知のポリマーの中から適宜選択して用いることができる。 Examples of the binder polymer include silicone polymers (for example, silicone-acrylic composite polymer, silicone-polyester composite polymer), polyester-based polymers (for example, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene-2,6-naphthalate (PEN)). ), Etc.), polyurethane polymers (eg, polymers comprising hexamethylene diisocyanate or toluene diisocyanate and ethylene glycol or propylene glycol), acrylic polymers (eg, polymers containing polymethyl methacrylate, polyethyl acrylate, etc.), Appropriately selected from known polymers such as polyolefin polymers (for example, polymers composed of polyethylene and acrylic acid or methacrylic acid) It can be used Te.
 これらの中でも、支持体との間又は着色層や下塗り層等の他の層との間の接着性、及び耐侯性(特に温湿度変化や熱や水分(湿度)を有する高い湿熱環境下での耐性)を確保する観点から、ポリエステル系ポリマー、ポリウレタン系ポリマー、フッ素系ポリマー、及びシリコーン系ポリマーからなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。
 更には、一般式(1)で表される化合物を取り込んでそれ自体の劣化をより効果的に防止し、耐侯性(特に温湿度変化や熱や水分(湿度)を有する高い湿熱環境下での耐性)がより向上する点で、フッ素系ポリマー、シリコーン系ポリマーが好ましく、シリコーン系ポリマーが特に好ましい。
Among these, adhesion between the support or other layers such as a colored layer and an undercoat layer, and weather resistance (particularly in a high humidity environment with temperature and humidity changes and heat and moisture (humidity)) From the viewpoint of ensuring (resistance), it is preferable to include at least one selected from the group consisting of polyester polymers, polyurethane polymers, fluorine polymers, and silicone polymers.
Furthermore, the compound represented by the general formula (1) is incorporated to prevent deterioration of itself more effectively, and is resistant to weathering (particularly in a high humidity environment having changes in temperature and humidity, heat and moisture (humidity)). In view of further improving resistance, a fluorine-based polymer and a silicone-based polymer are preferable, and a silicone-based polymer is particularly preferable.
 前記フッ素系ポリマーとしては、-(CFX-CX)-で表される繰り返し単位を有するポリマーが好ましい。なお、前記繰り返し単位において、X、X、及びXは、各々独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子、塩素原子、又は炭素数1~3のパーフルオロアルキル基を表す。 As the fluoropolymer, a polymer having a repeating unit represented by-(CFX 1 -CX 2 X 3 )-is preferable. In the repeating unit, X 1 , X 2 , and X 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, or a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
 フッ素系ポリマーの例としては、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン(以下、PTFEと表すことがある。)、ポリフッ化ビニル(以下、PVFと表すことがある。)、ポリフッ化ビニリデン(以下、PVDFと表すことがある。)、ポリ塩化3フッ化エチレン(以下、PCTFEと表すことがある。)、ポリテトラフルオロプロピレン(以下、HFPと表すことがある。)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the fluorine-based polymer include polytetrafluoroethylene (hereinafter sometimes referred to as PTFE), polyvinyl fluoride (hereinafter sometimes referred to as PVF), and polyvinylidene fluoride (hereinafter referred to as PVDF). ), Polychlorinated ethylene trifluoride (hereinafter sometimes referred to as PCTFE), polytetrafluoropropylene (hereinafter sometimes referred to as HFP), and the like.
 フッ素系ポリマーは、一種のモノマーを単独重合したホモポリマーでもよいし、2種以上のモノマーを共重合したものでもよい。共重合したポリマーの例として、テトラフルオロエチレンとテトラフルオロプロピレンとを共重合したコポリマー(P(TFE/HFP)と略記する。)、テトラフルオロエチレンとフッ化ビニリデンとを共重合したコポリマー(P(TFE/VDF)と略記する。)等を挙げることができる。 The fluoropolymer may be a homopolymer obtained by homopolymerizing one kind of monomer, or may be obtained by copolymerizing two or more kinds of monomers. As examples of the copolymerized copolymer, a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing tetrafluoroethylene and tetrafluoropropylene (abbreviated as P (TFE / HFP)), a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing tetrafluoroethylene and vinylidene fluoride (P ( Abbreviated as TFE / VDF)).
 さらに、-(CFX-CX)-の構造部分を有するフッ素系モノマーとそれ以外のモノマーとを共重合したポリマーでもよい。その例として、テトラフルオロエチレンとエチレンとの共重合体(P(TFE/E)と略記する。)、テトラフルオロエチレンとプロピレンとの共重合体(P(TFE/P)と略記する。)、テトラフルオロエチレンとビニルエーテルとの共重合体(P(TFE/VE)と略記する。)、テトラフルオロエチレンとパーフロロビニルエーテルとの共重合体(P(TFE/FVE)と略記する。)、クロロトリフルオロエチレンとビニルエーテルとの共重合体(P(CTFE/VE)と略記する。)、クロロトリフルオロエチレンとパーフロロビニルエーテルとの共重合体(P(CTFE/FVE)と略記する。)等を挙げることができる。 Further, it may be a polymer obtained by copolymerizing a fluorine-based monomer having a structural portion of-(CFX 1 -CX 2 X 3 )-and another monomer. For example, a copolymer of tetrafluoroethylene and ethylene (abbreviated as P (TFE / E)), a copolymer of tetrafluoroethylene and propylene (abbreviated as P (TFE / P)), Copolymer of tetrafluoroethylene and vinyl ether (abbreviated as P (TFE / VE)), copolymer of tetrafluoroethylene and perfluorovinyl ether (abbreviated as P (TFE / FVE)), chlorotri Copolymers of fluoroethylene and vinyl ether (abbreviated as P (CTFE / VE)), copolymers of chlorotrifluoroethylene and perfluorovinyl ether (abbreviated as P (CTFE / FVE)), and the like. be able to.
 フッ素系ポリマーは、有機溶剤に溶解して用いられるものでもよいし、ポリマー粒子として水に分散させて用いられるものでもよい。環境負荷が少ない点で後者が好ましい。フッ素系ポリマーの水分散物については、例えば特開2003-231722号公報、特開2002-20409号公報、特開平9-194538号公報等に記載されている。 The fluoropolymer may be used by being dissolved in an organic solvent, or may be used by being dispersed in water as polymer particles. The latter is preferable in that the environmental load is small. The aqueous dispersions of fluoropolymers are described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2003-231722, 2002-20409, and 9-194538.
 前記フッ素系ポリマーは、上市されている市販品を用いてもよく、該市販品の例として、AGCコーテック(株)製のオブリガートSW0011Fなどを挙げることができる。 Commercially available products that are commercially available may be used as the fluoropolymer, and examples of the commercially available products include Obligato SW0011F manufactured by AGC Co-Tech Co., Ltd.
 前記シリコーン系ポリマーとしては、例えば、シリコーンとアクリルの複合ポリマー、シリコーンとポリエステルの複合ポリマー等が挙げられる。シリコーン系ポリマーとして、上市されている市販品を用いてもよく、例えば、シリコーンとアクリルとの複合ポリマーの具体例として、DIC(株)製のセラネートWSA1060、同WSA1070等、旭化成ケミカルズ(株)製のH7620、H7630、H7650等、などを挙げることができる。 Examples of the silicone-based polymer include a composite polymer of silicone and acrylic, a composite polymer of silicone and polyester, and the like. Commercially available products that are marketed may be used as the silicone polymer. For example, as a specific example of a composite polymer of silicone and acrylic, Seranate WSA1060 and WSA1070 manufactured by DIC Corporation, Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corporation H7620, H7630, H7650, and the like.
 ポリマー層形成用の塗布液は、フッ素系ポリマー及び/又はシリコーン系ポリマーとこれらポリマー以外の他のポリマーとを併用してもよい。他のポリマーを併用する場合、フッ素系ポリマー及びシリコーン系ポリマー以外の前記ポリマーを、バインダー全質量の50質量%以下の範囲で併用することが好ましい。他のポリマーの量が50質量%以下であることで、バックシートとして良好な耐候性を発揮することができる。 The coating liquid for forming the polymer layer may be a combination of a fluorine-based polymer and / or a silicone-based polymer and a polymer other than these polymers. When other polymers are used in combination, it is preferable to use the polymers other than the fluorine-based polymer and the silicone-based polymer in the range of 50% by mass or less of the total mass of the binder. When the amount of the other polymer is 50% by mass or less, good weather resistance as a back sheet can be exhibited.
 前記バインダーポリマーのポリマー層形成用の塗布液中における濃度が、塗布液の全質量に対して、6質量%以上25質量%以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは8質量%以上20質量%以下である。バインダーポリマーの含有量は、6質量%以上であることで、強度の良好な層が得られ、25質量%以下であることで、紫外線吸収剤の量が相対的に少なくなり過ぎることがなく、耐光性能を高く保持するうえで好ましい。
 また、形成されたポリマー層中におけるバインダーポリマーの塗布量は、1.0~8.5g/mが好ましく、より好ましくは2.0~6.0g/m以下である。ポリマーの含有量は、1.0g/mであると、強度の良好な層が得られ、8.5g/m以下であると、紫外線吸収剤の量が相対的に少なくなり過ぎることがなく耐光性能を高く保持するうえで好ましい。
The concentration of the binder polymer in the coating solution for forming the polymer layer is preferably 6% by mass or more and 25% by mass or less, more preferably 8% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less, with respect to the total mass of the coating solution. It is. When the content of the binder polymer is 6% by mass or more, a layer having a good strength is obtained, and when the content is 25% by mass or less, the amount of the ultraviolet absorber is not relatively decreased. This is preferable for maintaining high light resistance.
The coating amount of the binder polymer in the formed polymer layer is preferably 1.0 to 8.5 g / m 2 , more preferably 2.0 to 6.0 g / m 2 or less. When the content of the polymer is 1.0 g / m 2 , a layer having good strength can be obtained, and when it is 8.5 g / m 2 or less, the amount of the UV absorber may be relatively too small. In view of maintaining high light resistance, it is preferable.
(架橋剤)
 ポリマー層形成用の塗布液は、ポリマー層中に含有されたバインダーポリマーを架橋するための架橋剤を含有してもよい。架橋剤としては、エポキシ系、イソシアネート系、メラミン系、カルボジイミド系、オキサゾリン系等の架橋剤を挙げることができる。これらのうち、湿熱経時後の接着性を確保する観点から、カルボジイミド系架橋剤、オキサゾリン系架橋剤が好ましい。
(Crosslinking agent)
The coating liquid for forming the polymer layer may contain a crosslinking agent for crosslinking the binder polymer contained in the polymer layer. Examples of the crosslinking agent include epoxy-based, isocyanate-based, melamine-based, carbodiimide-based, and oxazoline-based crosslinking agents. Of these, a carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent and an oxazoline-based crosslinking agent are preferable from the viewpoint of securing adhesiveness after wet heat aging.
 前記カルボジイミド系架橋剤の具体例としては、N,N’-ジシクロヘキシルカルボジイミド、N,N’-ジイソプロピルカルボジイミド、1-エチル-3-(3-ジメチルアミノプロピル)カルボジイミド塩酸塩、N-[3-(ジメチルアミノ)プロピル]-N’-エチルカルボジイミド、N-[3-(ジメチルアミノ)プロピル]-N’-プロピルカルボジイミド、N-tert-ブチル-N’-エチルカルボジイミド等が挙げられる。
 また、上市されている市販品として、カルボジライトV-02-L2(日清紡績(株)製)などが挙げられる。
Specific examples of the carbodiimide crosslinking agent include N, N′-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, N, N′-diisopropylcarbodiimide, 1-ethyl-3- (3-dimethylaminopropyl) carbodiimide hydrochloride, N- [3- ( And dimethylamino) propyl] -N′-ethylcarbodiimide, N- [3- (dimethylamino) propyl] -N′-propylcarbodiimide, N-tert-butyl-N′-ethylcarbodiimide, and the like.
Further, commercially available products include Carbodilite V-02-L2 (manufactured by Nisshinbo Industries, Inc.).
 前記オキサゾリン系架橋剤の具体例としては、2-ビニル-2-オキサゾリン、2-ビニル-4-メチル-2-オキサゾリン、2-ビニル-5-メチル-2-オキサゾリン、2-イソプロペニル-2-オキサゾリン、2-イソプロペニル-4-メチル-2-オキサゾリン、2-イソプロペニル-5-エチル-2-オキサゾリン、2,2’-ビス-(2-オキサゾリン)、2,2’-メチレン-ビス-(2-オキサゾリン)、2,2’-エチレン-ビス-(2-オキサゾリン)、2,2’-トリメチレン-ビス-(2-オキサゾリン)、2,2’-テトラメチレン-ビス-(2-オキサゾリン)、2、2’-ヘキサメチレン-ビス-(2-オキサゾリン)、2,2’-オクタメチレン-ビス-(2-オキサゾリン)、2,2’-エチレン-ビス-(4,4’-ジメチル-2-オキサゾリン)、2,2’-p-フェニレン-ビス-(2-オキサゾリン)、2,2’-m-フェニレン-ビス-(2-オキサゾリン)、2,2’-m-フェニレン-ビス-(4,4’-ジメチル-2-オキサゾリン)、ビス-(2-オキサゾリニルシクロヘキサン)スルフィド、ビス-(2-オキサゾリニルノルボルナン)スルフィド等が挙げられる。さらに、これらの化合物の(共)重合体も好ましく利用することができる。
 また、上市されている市販品として、エポクロスWS-700、エポクロスK-2020E(いずれも日本触媒(株)製)などを用いることができる。
Specific examples of the oxazoline-based crosslinking agent include 2-vinyl-2-oxazoline, 2-vinyl-4-methyl-2-oxazoline, 2-vinyl-5-methyl-2-oxazoline, 2-isopropenyl-2- Oxazoline, 2-isopropenyl-4-methyl-2-oxazoline, 2-isopropenyl-5-ethyl-2-oxazoline, 2,2'-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2'-methylene-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2′-ethylene-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2′-trimethylene-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2′-tetramethylene-bis- (2-oxazoline) ), 2,2′-hexamethylene-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2′-octamethylene-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2′-ethylene-bis- (4,4 ′) Dimethyl-2-oxazoline), 2,2'-p-phenylene-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2'-m-phenylene-bis- (2-oxazoline), 2,2'-m-phenylene- Examples thereof include bis- (4,4′-dimethyl-2-oxazoline), bis- (2-oxazolinylcyclohexane) sulfide, and bis- (2-oxazolinyl norbornane) sulfide. Furthermore, (co) polymers of these compounds can also be preferably used.
As commercially available products, Epocross WS-700, Epocross K-2020E (both manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.) and the like can be used.
 架橋剤のポリマー層中における含有量としては、バインダーに対して、0.5質量%以上100質量%以下が好ましく、0.5質量%以上50質量%以下がより好ましく、さらに好ましくは5.0質量%以上30質量%以下である。架橋剤の含有量は、0.5質量%以上であると、ポリマー層の強度及び接着性を保持しながら充分な架橋効果が得られ、40質量%以下、特に30質量%以下であると、ポリマー層を形成するための塗布液を調整したときの液のポットライフをより長く保つことができる。 The content of the crosslinking agent in the polymer layer is preferably 0.5% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less, and still more preferably 5.0% by mass with respect to the binder. The mass is 30% by mass or more. When the content of the crosslinking agent is 0.5% by mass or more, a sufficient crosslinking effect is obtained while maintaining the strength and adhesiveness of the polymer layer, and when it is 40% by mass or less, particularly 30% by mass or less, The pot life of the liquid when the coating liquid for forming the polymer layer is adjusted can be kept longer.
(顔料)
 本発明におけるポリマー層の形成に用いられる塗布液には、顔料を含有し、ポリマー層を着色層として形成するようにしてもよい。この場合、後述する着色層における場合と同様の顔料を用いることができ、好ましい態様も同様である。例えば、所望の色相の顔料を含ませて意匠性を持たせてもよいし、また白色顔料を含ませることによりポリマー層に反射層としての機能を付与してもよい。
(Pigment)
The coating liquid used for forming the polymer layer in the present invention may contain a pigment, and the polymer layer may be formed as a colored layer. In this case, the same pigment as in the colored layer described later can be used, and the preferred embodiment is also the same. For example, a pigment having a desired hue may be included to give design properties, or a white pigment may be included to give the polymer layer a function as a reflective layer.
(他の添加剤)
 ポリマー層形成用の塗布液は、必要に応じて、界面活性剤、フィラー等の他の添加剤を含んでいてもよい。
(Other additives)
The coating liquid for forming the polymer layer may contain other additives such as a surfactant and a filler as necessary.
 前記界面活性剤としては、アニオン系、ノニオン系(例えば、炭素数2又は3のアルキレン鎖とアルキル基の炭素数1~30,好ましくは炭素数2~24、更に好ましくは6~24のポリオキシアルキレンアルキルエーテル等)等の公知の界面活性剤を用いることができる。界面活性剤を含有する場合、ポリマー層中のその含有量の範囲は、0.1mg/m以上であると、層形成する場合にハジキの発生を抑えて良好な層が得られ、10mg/m以下であると、ポリマー支持体及び第2のポリマー層との間の接着を良好に保つことができる。 Examples of the surfactant include anionic and nonionic (for example, polyoxyalkylene having 2 or 3 carbon atoms and an alkyl group having 1 to 30, preferably 2 to 24, more preferably 6 to 24 carbon atoms). Known surfactants such as alkylene alkyl ethers can be used. When the surfactant is contained, the range of the content in the polymer layer is 0.1 mg / m 2 or more, and when the layer is formed, a good layer can be obtained while suppressing the occurrence of repelling. When it is m 2 or less, it is possible to maintain the adhesion between the polymer support and the second polymer layer satisfactorily.
 フィラーとしては、二酸化チタン等の公知のフィラー(無機微粒子)を用いることができる。フィラーを含有する場合、フィラーのポリマー層中における含有量は、ポリマー層中のバインダー量に対し、200質量%以下であるのが好ましく、より好ましくは150質量%以下である。フィラーの含有量が200質量%以下であると、塗布膜の膜面状がより良好に保てる。フィラーの含有量の下限は、0.5質量%であることが好ましい。フィラーの含有量が200質量%以下であると、良好な面状が得られる点で有利である。また、フィラーの含有量が0.5質量%以上であると、湿熱経時後の接着性が良好である。また、無機微粒子の含有量は、1質量%以上15質量%以下の範囲がより好ましい。 As the filler, a known filler (inorganic fine particles) such as titanium dioxide can be used. When the filler is contained, the content of the filler in the polymer layer is preferably 200% by mass or less, more preferably 150% by mass or less based on the amount of the binder in the polymer layer. When the content of the filler is 200% by mass or less, the film surface shape of the coating film can be kept better. The lower limit of the filler content is preferably 0.5% by mass. When the filler content is 200% by mass or less, it is advantageous in that a good surface shape can be obtained. Moreover, the adhesiveness after wet heat aging is favorable in content of a filler being 0.5 mass% or more. The content of the inorganic fine particles is more preferably in the range of 1% by mass to 15% by mass.
-保護ポリマー層-
 本発明におけるポリマー層形成工程では、2層以上のポリマー層を積層することができる。具体的には、支持体上に第1層目として一般式(1)で表される化合物とバインダーポリマーと必要に応じて他の成分とを含有する第1のポリマー層を形成した後、該第1のポリマー層の上に第2層目として、更に、一種又は二種以上のバインダーポリマー及び必要に応じて界面活性剤や架橋剤等の他の成分を含み、前記一般式(1)で表される化合物の含有量がバインダーポリマーの総量に対して1.0質量%以下である第2のポリマー層(以下、「保護ポリマー層」ともいう。)を有する態様も好ましい。保護ポリマー層は、更に、一般式(1)で表される化合物及び他の紫外線吸収剤の合計の含有量がバインダーポリマーの総量に対して1.0質量%以下である場合が好ましい。
-Protective polymer layer-
In the polymer layer forming step in the present invention, two or more polymer layers can be laminated. Specifically, after forming the first polymer layer containing the compound represented by the general formula (1), the binder polymer, and other components as necessary, as the first layer on the support, As the second layer on the first polymer layer, it further contains one or more binder polymers and optionally other components such as a surfactant and a crosslinking agent. An embodiment having a second polymer layer (hereinafter also referred to as “protective polymer layer”) in which the content of the represented compound is 1.0% by mass or less with respect to the total amount of the binder polymer is also preferable. The protective polymer layer preferably further has a total content of the compound represented by the general formula (1) and other ultraviolet absorbers of 1.0% by mass or less based on the total amount of the binder polymer.
 紫外線吸収剤(一般式(1)で表される化合物を含む。)が主に含まれる前記ポリマー層が保護ポリマー層により保護された積層構造を有することにより、紫外線吸収剤を多く含有するポリマー層を表層に有する場合に比べて、紫外線の吸収がより安定し、長期経時での支持体のひび割れや、剥離等として現れる劣化を抑制することができる。 A polymer layer containing a large amount of an ultraviolet absorber by having a laminated structure in which the polymer layer mainly containing an ultraviolet absorber (including a compound represented by the general formula (1)) is protected by a protective polymer layer. As compared with the case where the surface layer is included, the absorption of ultraviolet rays is more stable, and it is possible to suppress deterioration that appears as cracks or peeling of the support over a long period of time.
 保護ポリマー層は、本発明の効果を損なわない程度に紫外線吸収剤(一般式(1)で表される化合物を含む。)を含んでいてもよいが、一般式(1)で表される化合物の含有量、ひいては紫外線吸収剤の含有量を、全バインダー質量の1.0質量%以下とし、保護ポリマー層が紫外線吸収剤を実質的に含まないことが好ましく、紫外線吸収剤を含まない(0質量%)ことがより好ましい。紫外線吸収剤の含有量が全バインダー質量の1質量%以下とは、紫外線吸収剤の含有を全く除外しないものの、紫外線吸収剤を積極的に含有しないことを意味する。 The protective polymer layer may contain an ultraviolet absorber (including the compound represented by the general formula (1)) to the extent that the effects of the present invention are not impaired, but the compound represented by the general formula (1). It is preferable that the content of the UV absorber, and hence the content of the UV absorber, is 1.0% by mass or less of the total binder mass, and the protective polymer layer does not substantially contain the UV absorber and does not contain the UV absorber (0 (Mass%) is more preferable. The content of the ultraviolet absorber of 1% by mass or less of the total binder mass means that the ultraviolet absorber is not actively contained, although the inclusion of the ultraviolet absorber is not excluded at all.
 保護ポリマー層に含有されるバインダーポリマーとしては、例えば、フッ素系ポリマー、シリコーン系ポリマー、ポリエステル系ポリマー、ポリウレタン系ポリマー、アクリル系ポリマー、ポリオレフィン系ポリマー等の公知のポリマーが挙げられ、適宜選択して用いることができる。前記ポリマーの具体例等の詳細及び好ましい態様については、前記ポリマー層において記載した通りである。
 これらの中でも、温湿度変化や高い湿熱環境に曝されたときの耐久性能をより向上させる観点から、フッ素系ポリマー、及びシリコーン系ポリマーからなる群より選ばれる1種又は2種以上を含むことが好ましい。
Examples of the binder polymer contained in the protective polymer layer include known polymers such as a fluorine polymer, a silicone polymer, a polyester polymer, a polyurethane polymer, an acrylic polymer, and a polyolefin polymer. Can be used. Details and preferred embodiments of specific examples and the like of the polymer are as described in the polymer layer.
Among these, from the viewpoint of further improving the durability performance when exposed to changes in temperature and humidity and high humidity and heat environment, it may contain one or more selected from the group consisting of fluorine-based polymers and silicone-based polymers. preferable.
 バインダーポリマーの保護ポリマー層中における含有量は、保護ポリマー層の全質量に対して、50質量%以上95質量%以下が好ましく、より好ましくは60質量%以上90質量%以下である。ポリマーの含有量は、50質量%以上であると良好な耐久性が得られ、95質量%以下であると、架橋剤や界面活性剤の量を確保できるので、膜強度や塗布面状の点で有利である。 The content of the binder polymer in the protective polymer layer is preferably 50% by mass to 95% by mass, and more preferably 60% by mass to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the protective polymer layer. When the content of the polymer is 50% by mass or more, good durability is obtained, and when it is 95% by mass or less, the amount of the crosslinking agent and the surfactant can be secured. Is advantageous.
 保護ポリマー層は、前記バインダーポリマーを架橋するための架橋剤の少なくとも一種をさらに含有することが好ましい。架橋剤としては、エポキシ系、イソシアネート系、メラミン系、カルボジイミド系、オキサゾリン系等の架橋剤を挙げることができる。これらのうち、湿熱経時後の接着性を確保する観点から、カルボジイミド系架橋剤、オキサゾリン系架橋剤が好ましく、カルボジイミド系架橋剤がより好ましい。
 なお、架橋剤の詳細、特にカルボジイミド系架橋剤、オキサゾリン系架橋剤の詳細及び好ましい態様については、前記ポリマー層において記載した通りである。
It is preferable that the protective polymer layer further contains at least one crosslinking agent for crosslinking the binder polymer. Examples of the crosslinking agent include epoxy-based, isocyanate-based, melamine-based, carbodiimide-based, and oxazoline-based crosslinking agents. Among these, a carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent and an oxazoline-based crosslinking agent are preferable, and a carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent is more preferable from the viewpoint of securing adhesiveness after wet heat aging.
The details of the crosslinking agent, particularly the details and preferred embodiments of the carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent and the oxazoline-based crosslinking agent are as described in the polymer layer.
 架橋剤の保護ポリマー層中における含有量としては、層を構成するバインダーポリマーに対して、0.5質量%以上40質量%以下が好ましく、0.5質量%以上30質量%以下がより好ましい。架橋剤の含有量は、0.5質量%以上であると、ポリマー層の強度及び接着性を保持しながら充分な架橋効果が得られ、40質量%以下、特に30質量%以下であると、ポリマー層を形成するための塗布液を調整したときの液のポットライフをより長く保つことができる。 The content of the crosslinking agent in the protective polymer layer is preferably 0.5% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 0.5% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less with respect to the binder polymer constituting the layer. When the content of the crosslinking agent is 0.5% by mass or more, a sufficient crosslinking effect is obtained while maintaining the strength and adhesiveness of the polymer layer, and when it is 40% by mass or less, particularly 30% by mass or less, The pot life of the liquid when the coating liquid for forming the polymer layer is adjusted can be kept longer.
 また、保護ポリマー層は、必要に応じて、更に界面活性剤、フィラー(無機微粒子)等の他の添加剤を含んでいてもよい。これらの詳細については、既述の通りである。 The protective polymer layer may further contain other additives such as a surfactant and a filler (inorganic fine particles) as necessary. These details are as described above.
 保護ポリマー層の厚みとしては、0.5~12μmが好ましい。保護ポリマー層の厚みは、0.5μm以上であるとより高い耐久性能が得られ、また12μm以下であると面状が良好で隣接層との接着性に優れる。保護ポリマー層の厚みは、1.0~10μmがより好ましい。 The thickness of the protective polymer layer is preferably 0.5 to 12 μm. When the thickness of the protective polymer layer is 0.5 μm or more, higher durability can be obtained, and when it is 12 μm or less, the surface shape is good and the adhesiveness to the adjacent layer is excellent. The thickness of the protective polymer layer is more preferably 1.0 to 10 μm.
 保護ポリマー層は、バインダーポリマー等を含む塗布液を調製し、この塗布液を第1のポリマー層上に塗布し乾燥させることにより形成することができる。乾燥後、加熱する等して硬化させてもよい。塗布方法や用いる塗布液の溶媒には、特に制限はない。塗布方法は、例えばグラビアコーターやバーコーターを利用することができる。塗布液の調製に用いる溶媒は、水、及びトルエン、メチルエチルケトン等の有機溶媒の中から1種又は2種以上を選択して用いることができる。保護ポリマー層の形成は、ポリマーを水分散した水系塗布液を調製しこれを塗布する方法によるのが好ましい。この場合、溶媒中の水の割合は60質量%以上が好ましく、80質量%以上がより好ましい。 The protective polymer layer can be formed by preparing a coating solution containing a binder polymer or the like, applying the coating solution on the first polymer layer, and drying the coating solution. After drying, it may be cured by heating. There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the coating method and the solvent of the coating liquid to be used. As a coating method, for example, a gravure coater or a bar coater can be used. The solvent used for the preparation of the coating solution can be selected from one or more of water and organic solvents such as toluene and methyl ethyl ketone. The protective polymer layer is preferably formed by a method in which an aqueous coating solution in which a polymer is dispersed in water is prepared and applied. In this case, the proportion of water in the solvent is preferably 60% by mass or more, and more preferably 80% by mass or more.
 本発明の樹脂フィルムは、上記のほか、必要に応じて、着色層等の他の層を有してもよい。この場合、例えば、支持体の一方にポリマー層が設けられ、他方に着色層(特に光反射層)が設けられた太陽電池用バックシートに構成することができる。 In addition to the above, the resin film of the present invention may have other layers such as a colored layer as necessary. In this case, for example, it can be configured as a solar cell backsheet in which a polymer layer is provided on one of the supports and a colored layer (particularly a light reflecting layer) is provided on the other.
-着色層-
 本発明の樹脂フィルムは、支持体の一方の側に着色層が設けられていてもよい。この場合、本発明の樹脂フィルムの一例として、太陽電池用バックシートとして適用することができる。太陽電池用バックシートの具体例として、支持体の受光側(太陽電池素子が設けられた電池側基板と向き合う側)に着色層が設けられ、着色層が設けられた側と反対側に裏面保護層として既述の本発明におけるポリマー層が設けられた態様が好ましい。
-Colored layer-
In the resin film of the present invention, a colored layer may be provided on one side of the support. In this case, it can apply as a back sheet for solar cells as an example of the resin film of this invention. As a specific example of a solar cell backsheet, a colored layer is provided on the light-receiving side of the support (the side facing the battery-side substrate provided with the solar cell element), and the back side is protected on the side opposite to the side provided with the colored layer. A mode in which the above-described polymer layer in the present invention is provided as a layer is preferable.
 本発明における着色層は、少なくとも顔料とバインダーとを含有し、必要に応じて、更に各種添加剤などの他の成分を含んで構成されてもよい。 The colored layer in the present invention contains at least a pigment and a binder, and may further include other components such as various additives as necessary.
 本発明の樹脂フィルムを太陽電池用バックシートとする場合、着色層の機能としては、第1に、入射光のうち太陽電池セルを通過して発電に使用されずにバックシートに到達した光を反射させて太陽電池セルに戻すことにより、太陽電池モジュールの発電効率を上げること、第2に、太陽電池モジュールを太陽光が入射する側(オモテ面側)から見た場合の外観の装飾性を向上すること、等が挙げられる。一般に太陽電池モジュールをオモテ面側(ガラス基板側)から見ると、太陽電池セルの周囲にバックシートが見えており、バックシートに着色層を設けることにより、バックシート自体の装飾性を向上させて見栄えを改善することができる。 When the resin film of the present invention is used as a back sheet for solar cells, as a function of the colored layer, first, the light that has passed through the solar cells and reaches the back sheet without being used for power generation among the incident light. Increasing the power generation efficiency of the solar cell module by reflecting it back to the solar cell, and secondly, the decorativeness of the appearance when the solar cell module is viewed from the side where sunlight enters (front side) And so on. In general, when the solar cell module is viewed from the front side (glass substrate side), the back sheet is visible around the solar cell, and by providing a colored layer on the back sheet, the decorativeness of the back sheet itself is improved. The appearance can be improved.
(顔料)
 着色層は、顔料の少なくとも一種を含有することができる。
 顔料としては、例えば、二酸化チタン、硫酸バリウム、酸化珪素、酸化アルミニウム、酸化マグネシウム、炭酸カルシウム、カオリン、タルク、群青、紺青、カーボンブラック等の無機顔料、フタロシアニンブルー、フタロシアニングリーン等の有機顔料を、適宜選択して含有することができる。
(Pigment)
The colored layer can contain at least one pigment.
Examples of the pigment include inorganic pigments such as titanium dioxide, barium sulfate, silicon oxide, aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, calcium carbonate, kaolin, talc, ultramarine blue, bitumen, and carbon black, and organic pigments such as phthalocyanine blue and phthalocyanine green. It can be appropriately selected and contained.
 着色層を、太陽電池に入射して太陽電池セルを通過した光を反射して太陽電池セルに戻す反射層として構成する場合、白色無機粒子を含むことが好ましい。白色無機粒子としては、二酸化チタン、硫酸バリウム、酸化珪素、酸化アルミニウム、酸化マグネシウム、炭酸カルシウム、カオリン、タルク等の白色顔料が好ましい。中でも、二酸化チタンが好ましい。 When the colored layer is configured as a reflective layer that reflects light that has entered the solar cell and passed through the solar cell and returns it to the solar cell, it is preferable to include white inorganic particles. As the white inorganic particles, white pigments such as titanium dioxide, barium sulfate, silicon oxide, aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, calcium carbonate, kaolin and talc are preferable. Of these, titanium dioxide is preferable.
 反射層を形成する場合、反射層中の白色無機粒子の含有量としては、バインダーポリマー及び白色無機粒子の合計質量に対して、30質量%~90質量%の範囲が好ましく、より好ましい白色無機粒子の含有量の範囲は50~85質量%である。白色無機粒子の反射層中の含有量は、30質量%以上であると良好な反射率が得られ、90質量%以下であることで太陽電池用バックシートの軽量化を図ることができる。 When the reflective layer is formed, the content of the white inorganic particles in the reflective layer is preferably in the range of 30% by mass to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the binder polymer and the white inorganic particles, and more preferably white inorganic particles. The range of the content of is 50 to 85% by mass. When the content of the white inorganic particles in the reflective layer is 30% by mass or more, a good reflectance is obtained, and when the content is 90% by mass or less, the back sheet for solar cells can be reduced in weight.
 顔料の着色層中における含有量は、2.5~12g/mの範囲が好ましく、2.5~8.5g/mの範囲がより好ましい。顔料の含有量が2.5g/m以上であると、必要な着色が得られ、反射率や装飾性を効果的に与えることができる。また、着色層中における顔料の含有量が12g/m以下であると、着色層の面状を良好に維持しやすく、膜強度により優れる。 The content of the pigment in the colored layer is preferably in the range of 2.5 to 12 g / m 2 , and more preferably in the range of 2.5 to 8.5 g / m 2 . When the pigment content is 2.5 g / m 2 or more, necessary coloring can be obtained, and reflectance and decorative properties can be effectively provided. In addition, when the content of the pigment in the colored layer is 12 g / m 2 or less, the planar shape of the colored layer is easily maintained and the film strength is excellent.
 着色層を反射層として設ける場合、反射層中には、白色無機粒子を4~12g/mの範囲で含有することが好ましい。白色無機粒子の含有量が4g/m以上であると、必要な反射率が得られ易く、含有量が12g/m以下であることでバックシートの軽量化が図れる。中でも、反射層中の白色無機粒子のより好ましい含量は、5~11g/mの範囲である。
 なお、反射層が2種類以上の白色無機粒子を含有する場合は、反射層中の全白色無機粒子の含有量の合計を4~12g/mの範囲とすることが好ましい。
When the colored layer is provided as a reflective layer, the reflective layer preferably contains white inorganic particles in the range of 4 to 12 g / m 2 . When the content of the white inorganic particles is 4 g / m 2 or more, the required reflectance is easily obtained, and when the content is 12 g / m 2 or less, the weight of the back sheet can be reduced. Among these, a more preferable content of white inorganic particles in the reflective layer is in the range of 5 to 11 g / m 2 .
When the reflective layer contains two or more types of white inorganic particles, the total content of all white inorganic particles in the reflective layer is preferably in the range of 4 to 12 g / m 2 .
 顔料の平均粒径としては、体積平均粒径で0.03~0.8μmが好ましく、より好ましくは0.15~0.5μm程度である。平均粒径が前記範囲内であると、光の反射効率が高い。体積平均粒径は、レーザー解析/散乱式粒子径分布測定装置LA950〔(株)堀場製作所製〕により測定される値である。 The average particle diameter of the pigment is preferably 0.03 to 0.8 μm, more preferably about 0.15 to 0.5 μm in volume average particle diameter. When the average particle size is within the above range, the light reflection efficiency is high. The volume average particle diameter is a value measured by a laser analysis / scattering particle size distribution measuring apparatus LA950 (manufactured by Horiba, Ltd.).
 着色層を構成するバインダーとしては、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、アクリル樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、シリコーン樹脂等を用いることができる。これらの中でも、高い接着性を確保する観点から、アクリル樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂が好ましい。また。複合樹脂を用いてもよく、例えばアクリル/シリコーン複合樹脂も好ましいバインダーである。
 バインダー成分の含有量は、顔料に対して、15~200質量%の範囲が好ましく、17~100質量%の範囲がより好ましい。バインダーの含有量は、15質量%以上であると、着色層の強度が充分に得られ、また200質量%以下であると、反射率や装飾性を良好に保つことができる。
As the binder constituting the colored layer, a polyester resin, a polyurethane resin, an acrylic resin, a polyolefin resin, a silicone resin, or the like can be used. Among these, acrylic resin and polyolefin resin are preferable from the viewpoint of ensuring high adhesiveness. Also. Composite resins may be used, for example acrylic / silicone composite resins are also preferred binders.
The content of the binder component is preferably in the range of 15 to 200% by mass and more preferably in the range of 17 to 100% by mass with respect to the pigment. When the content of the binder is 15% by mass or more, the strength of the colored layer is sufficiently obtained, and when it is 200% by mass or less, the reflectance and the decorativeness can be kept good.
(添加剤)
 着色層には、必要に応じて、架橋剤、界面活性剤、フィラー等を添加してもよい。
 前記架橋剤としては、エポキシ系、イソシアネート系、メラミン系、カルボジイミド系、オキサゾリン系等の架橋剤を挙げることができる。架橋剤の詳細、特にカルボジイミド系架橋剤、オキサゾリン系架橋剤の詳細及び好ましい態様については、前記第1のポリマー層において記載した通りである。架橋剤の添加量は、層中のバインダー当たり5~50質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは10~40質量%である。
(Additive)
You may add a crosslinking agent, surfactant, a filler, etc. to a colored layer as needed.
Examples of the crosslinking agent include epoxy-based, isocyanate-based, melamine-based, carbodiimide-based, and oxazoline-based crosslinking agents. Details of the crosslinking agent, particularly details and preferred embodiments of the carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent and oxazoline-based crosslinking agent, are as described in the first polymer layer. The addition amount of the crosslinking agent is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably 10 to 40% by mass, based on the binder in the layer.
 前記界面活性剤としては、アニオン系、ノニオン系等の公知の界面活性剤を用いることができる。界面活性剤の詳細及び好ましい態様については、前記第1のポリマー層において記載した通りである。界面活性剤を含有する場合の含有量は、0.1~15mg/mが好ましく、より好ましくは0.5~5mg/mである。 As the surfactant, known surfactants such as anionic and nonionic surfactants can be used. The details and preferred embodiments of the surfactant are as described in the first polymer layer. When the surfactant is contained, the content is preferably 0.1 to 15 mg / m 2 , more preferably 0.5 to 5 mg / m 2 .
 前記フィラーとしては、コロイダルシリカ、二酸化チタン等の公知のフィラーを用いることができる。フィラーの含有量は、着色層のバインダー当たり20質量%以下が好ましく、より好ましくは15質量%以下である。 As the filler, known fillers such as colloidal silica and titanium dioxide can be used. The content of the filler is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less per binder of the colored layer.
 着色層の形成は、顔料を含有するポリマーシートを支持体に貼合する方法、基材形成時に着色層を共押出しする方法、塗布による方法等により行なえる。具体的には、支持体の表面に直にあるいは厚み2μm以下の下塗り層を介して、貼合、共押出し、塗布等することにより着色層を形成することができる。形成された着色層は、支持体の表面に直に接した状態であっても、あるいは下塗り層を介して積層した状態であってもよい。
 上記のうち、塗布による方法は、簡便であると共に、均一性で薄膜での形成が可能である点で好ましい。
The colored layer can be formed by a method in which a polymer sheet containing a pigment is bonded to a support, a method in which a colored layer is co-extruded during substrate formation, a method by coating, or the like. Specifically, the colored layer can be formed by bonding, co-extrusion, coating or the like directly on the surface of the support or through an undercoat layer having a thickness of 2 μm or less. The formed colored layer may be in a state of being in direct contact with the surface of the support or in a state of being laminated via an undercoat layer.
Among the methods described above, the method by coating is preferable because it is simple and can be formed in a thin film with uniformity.
 塗布による場合、塗布方法としては、例えば、グラビアコーター、バーコーターなどの公知の塗布方法を利用することができる。塗布液は、塗布溶媒として水を用いた水系でもよいし、トルエンやメチルエチルケトン等の有機溶媒を用いた溶剤系でもよい。中でも、環境負荷の観点から、水を溶媒とすることが好ましい。塗布溶媒は、1種類を単独で用いてもよいし、2種類以上を混合して用いてもよい。具体的には、例えば反射層を形成する場合、ポリマー支持体の前記第1及び第2のポリマー層が形成されていない側の面に、白色無機粒子、バインダー、及びその他必要に応じて含まれる成分を含有する反射層形成用塗布液を塗布することにより形成することができる。 In the case of coating, a known coating method such as a gravure coater or a bar coater can be used as the coating method. The coating solution may be an aqueous system using water as an application solvent, or a solvent system using an organic solvent such as toluene or methyl ethyl ketone. Among these, from the viewpoint of environmental burden, it is preferable to use water as a solvent. A coating solvent may be used individually by 1 type, and may mix and use 2 or more types. Specifically, for example, when a reflective layer is formed, white inorganic particles, a binder, and other components are included as necessary on the surface of the polymer support on which the first and second polymer layers are not formed. It can form by apply | coating the coating liquid for reflection layer formation containing a component.
-易接着性層-
 本発明の樹脂フィルムは、支持体の一方の側に、有機成分に対して易接着性の易接着性層が設けられていてもよい。本発明の樹脂フィルムは、例えば、易接着性層が(特に前記着色層の上に)設けられた太陽電池用バックシートであってもよい。この場合、易接着性層は、太陽電池素子を備えた電池側基板(電池本体)の太陽電池素子を封止する封止材との間で強固に接着し易くするための層である。
-Easy adhesion layer-
In the resin film of the present invention, an easy-adhesive layer that is easily adhesive to the organic component may be provided on one side of the support. The resin film of the present invention may be, for example, a solar cell backsheet in which an easy-adhesion layer is provided (particularly on the colored layer). In this case, the easy-adhesion layer is a layer for easily adhering firmly to the sealing material that seals the solar cell element of the battery side substrate (battery body) provided with the solar cell element.
 易接着性層は、バインダー、無機微粒子を用いて構成することができ、必要に応じて、さらに添加剤などの他の成分を含んで構成されてもよい。易接着性層は、電池側基板の発電素子を封止する封止材(例えばエチレン-ビニルアセテート(EVA;エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体)、ポリビニルブチラール(PVB)、エポキシ樹脂等)に対して、10N/cm以上(好ましくは20N/cm以上)の接着力を有するように構成されていることが好ましい。接着力が10N/cm以上であると、接着性を維持し得る湿熱耐性が得られやすい。
 なお、接着力は、易接着性層中のバインダー及び無機微粒子の量を調節する方法、バックシートの封止材と接着する面にコロナ処理を施す方法などにより調整が可能である。
The easy-adhesion layer can be formed using a binder and inorganic fine particles, and may further include other components such as additives as necessary. The easy-adhesion layer is used for a sealing material (for example, ethylene-vinyl acetate (EVA; ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer), polyvinyl butyral (PVB), epoxy resin, etc.) that seals the power generation element of the battery side substrate. It is preferably configured to have an adhesive force of 10 N / cm or more (preferably 20 N / cm or more). When the adhesive force is 10 N / cm or more, it is easy to obtain wet heat resistance capable of maintaining adhesiveness.
The adhesive strength can be adjusted by a method of adjusting the amount of the binder and inorganic fine particles in the easy-adhesive layer, a method of applying a corona treatment to the surface of the back sheet that adheres to the sealing material, and the like.
(バインダー)
 易接着性層は、バインダーの少なくとも一種を含有することができる。
 易接着性層に好適なバインダーとしては、例えば、ポリエステル、ポリウレタン、アクリル樹脂、ポリオレフィン等が挙げられ、中でも耐久性の観点から、アクリル樹脂、ポリオレフィンが好ましい。また、アクリル樹脂として、アクリルとシリコーンとの複合樹脂も好ましい。
(binder)
The easy-adhesion layer can contain at least one binder.
Examples of the binder suitable for the easy-adhesive layer include polyester, polyurethane, acrylic resin, polyolefin, and the like. Among these, acrylic resin and polyolefin are preferable from the viewpoint of durability. As the acrylic resin, a composite resin of acrylic and silicone is also preferable.
 好ましいバインダーの例としては、ポリオレフィンの具体例としてケミパールS-120、S-75N(ともに三井化学(株)製)、アクリル樹脂の具体例としてジュリマーET-410、SEK-301(ともに日本純薬(株)製)、アクリルとシリコーンとの複合樹脂の具体例としてセラネートWSA1060、WSA1070(ともにDIC(株)製)とH7620、H7630、H7650(ともに旭化成ケミカルズ(株)製)などを挙げることができる。 Examples of preferred binders include Chemipearl S-120 and S-75N (both manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals) as specific examples of polyolefins, and Jurimer ET-410 and SEK-301 (both Nippon Pure Chemical (both manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals, Inc.)). As a specific example of the composite resin of acrylic and silicone, Ceranate WSA1060, WSA1070 (both manufactured by DIC Corporation) and H7620, H7630, H7650 (both manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corporation) and the like can be given.
 バインダーの易接着性層中における含有量は、0.05~5g/mの範囲とすることが好ましい。中でも、0.08~3g/mの範囲がより好ましい。バインダーの含有量は、0.05g/m以上であると所望とする接着力が得られやすく、5g/m以下であるとより良好な面状が得られる。 The content of the binder in the easy-adhesive layer is preferably in the range of 0.05 to 5 g / m 2 . In particular, the range of 0.08 to 3 g / m 2 is more preferable. The content of the binder, 0.05 g / m 2 or more is desired as easy adhesion obtained to that, better surface state is obtained when the is 5 g / m 2 or less.
(無機微粒子)
 易接着性層は、無機微粒子の少なくとも一種を含有することができる。
 無機微粒子としては、例えば、シリカ、炭酸カルシウム、酸化マグネシウム、炭酸マグネシウム、酸化錫等が挙げられる。中でも、湿熱雰囲気に曝されたときの接着性の低下が小さい点で、酸化錫、シリカの微粒子が好ましい。
(Inorganic fine particles)
The easily adhesive layer can contain at least one kind of inorganic fine particles.
Examples of the inorganic fine particles include silica, calcium carbonate, magnesium oxide, magnesium carbonate, and tin oxide. Among these, fine particles of tin oxide and silica are preferable in that the decrease in adhesiveness when exposed to a humid heat atmosphere is small.
 無機微粒子の粒径は、体積平均粒径で10~700nm程度が好ましく、より好ましくは20~300nm程度である。粒径がこの範囲内であると、より良好な易接着性を得ることができる。粒径は、レーザー解析/散乱式粒子径分布測定装置LA950〔(株)堀場製作所製〕により測定される値である。 The particle size of the inorganic fine particles is preferably about 10 to 700 nm, more preferably about 20 to 300 nm in terms of volume average particle size. When the particle size is within this range, better easy adhesion can be obtained. The particle size is a value measured by a laser analysis / scattering particle size distribution measuring apparatus LA950 (manufactured by Horiba, Ltd.).
 無機微粒子の形状には、特に制限はなく、球形、不定形、針状形等のいずれのものを用いることができる。 The shape of the inorganic fine particles is not particularly limited, and any shape such as a spherical shape, an irregular shape, or a needle shape can be used.
 無機微粒子の含有量は、易接着性層中のバインダーに対して、5~400質量%の範囲が好ましい。無機微粒子の含有量は、5質量%以上であると、湿熱雰囲気に曝されたときに良好な接着性が保持でき、400質量%以下であると、易接着性層の面状が良好である。中でも、無機微粒子の含有量は、50~300質量%の範囲が好ましい。 The content of the inorganic fine particles is preferably in the range of 5 to 400% by mass with respect to the binder in the easy-adhesive layer. When the content of the inorganic fine particles is 5% by mass or more, good adhesiveness can be maintained when exposed to a moist heat atmosphere, and when it is 400% by mass or less, the surface state of the easily adhesive layer is good. . In particular, the content of inorganic fine particles is preferably in the range of 50 to 300% by mass.
(架橋剤)
 易接着性層には、架橋剤の少なくとも一種を含有することができる。
 易接着性層に好適な架橋剤としては、エポキシ系、イソシアネート系、メラミン系、カルボジイミド系、オキサゾリン系等の架橋剤を挙げることができる。中でも、湿熱経時後の接着性を確保する観点から、オキサゾリン系架橋剤が特に好ましい。
 架橋剤の詳細、特にカルボジイミド系架橋剤、オキサゾリン系架橋剤の詳細及び好ましい態様については、前記第1のポリマー層において記載した通りである。また、オキサゾリン基を有する化合物として、上市されている市販品としては、エポクロスK2010E、同K2020E、同K2030E、同WS-500、同WS-700(いずれも(株)日本触媒製)等も使用可能である。
(Crosslinking agent)
The easily adhesive layer can contain at least one crosslinking agent.
Examples of the crosslinking agent suitable for the easily adhesive layer include epoxy-based, isocyanate-based, melamine-based, carbodiimide-based, and oxazoline-based crosslinking agents. Among these, an oxazoline-based cross-linking agent is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of ensuring adhesiveness after wet heat aging.
Details of the crosslinking agent, particularly details and preferred embodiments of the carbodiimide-based crosslinking agent and oxazoline-based crosslinking agent, are as described in the first polymer layer. Moreover, as a commercially available product having an oxazoline group, Epocros K2010E, K2020E, K2030E, WS-500, WS-700 (all manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.), etc. can be used. It is.
 架橋剤の易接着性層中における含有量としては、易接着性層中のバインダーに対して、5~50質量%が好ましく、中でもより好ましくは20~40質量%である。架橋剤の含有量は、5質量%以上であると、良好な架橋効果が得られ、着色層の強度や接着性を保持することができ、50質量%以下であると、塗布液のポットライフを長く保つことができる。 The content of the crosslinking agent in the easy-adhesive layer is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably 20 to 40% by mass, based on the binder in the easy-adhesive layer. When the content of the crosslinking agent is 5% by mass or more, a good crosslinking effect can be obtained, and the strength and adhesiveness of the colored layer can be maintained. When the content is 50% by mass or less, the pot life of the coating liquid Can be kept long.
(添加剤)
 易接着性層には、必要に応じて、更に、ポリスチレン、ポリメチルメタクリレート、シリカ等の公知のマット剤、アニオン系やノニオン系などの公知の界面活性剤などを添加してもよい。
(Additive)
If necessary, the easily adhesive layer may further contain a known matting agent such as polystyrene, polymethylmethacrylate, or silica, or a known surfactant such as anionic or nonionic.
 易接着性層の形成は、易接着性を有するポリマーシートを支持体に貼合する方法や、塗布による方法が挙げられる。中でも、塗布による方法は、簡便であると共に、均一性で薄膜での形成が可能である点で好ましい。塗布方法としては、例えば、グラビアコーターやバーコーターなどの公知の塗布法を利用することができる。塗布液の調製に用いる塗布溶媒は、水でもよいし、トルエンやメチルエチルケトン等の有機溶媒でもよい。塗布溶媒は、1種類を単独で用いてもよいし、2種類以上を混合して用いてもよい。 The formation of the easy-adhesion layer includes a method of bonding a polymer sheet having easy adhesion to a support or a method by coating. Especially, the method by application | coating is preferable at the point which is easy and can form in a thin film with uniformity. As a coating method, for example, a known coating method such as a gravure coater or a bar coater can be used. The coating solvent used for preparing the coating solution may be water or an organic solvent such as toluene or methyl ethyl ketone. A coating solvent may be used individually by 1 type, and may mix and use 2 or more types.
 易接着性層の厚みには、特に制限はないが、通常は0.05~8μmが好ましく、より好ましくは0.1~5μmの範囲である。易接着性層の厚みは、0.05μm以上であると必要な易接着性を好適に得ることができ、8μm以下であると面状がより良好になる。
また、本発明の易接着性層は、着色層の効果を低減させないために、透明であることが必要である。
The thickness of the easy-adhesion layer is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 0.05 to 8 μm, more preferably 0.1 to 5 μm. When the thickness of the easy-adhesion layer is 0.05 μm or more, necessary easy adhesion can be suitably obtained, and when it is 8 μm or less, the surface shape becomes better.
In addition, the easily adhesive layer of the present invention needs to be transparent so as not to reduce the effect of the colored layer.
-支持体-
 本発明の樹脂フィルムは、支持体を設けて構成されている。支持体としては、従来から知られている支持基材を適宜選択することができる。
-Support-
The resin film of the present invention is configured by providing a support. As the support, a conventionally known support substrate can be appropriately selected.
 ポリマー層に特定の紫外線吸収剤を用いることによる耐光性能の向上効果をより一層高める観点から、ポリマー基材が好ましい。ポリマー基材としては、例えば、ポリエステル、ポリプロピレンやポリエチレンなどのポリオレフィン、又はポリフッ化ビニルなどのフッ素系ポリマー等を用いた基材が挙げられる。これらの中では、コストや機械強度などの点から、ポリエステル基材が好ましい。 From the viewpoint of further enhancing the effect of improving light resistance by using a specific ultraviolet absorber in the polymer layer, a polymer substrate is preferred. Examples of the polymer base material include base materials using polyester, polyolefins such as polypropylene and polyethylene, or fluorine-based polymers such as polyvinyl fluoride. Among these, a polyester base material is preferable from the viewpoint of cost and mechanical strength.
 本発明における支持体として用いられるポリエステルとしては、芳香族二塩基酸又はそのエステル形成性誘導体とジオール又はそのエステル形成性誘導体とから合成される線状飽和ポリエステルである。かかるポリエステルの具体例としては、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンイソフタレート、ポリブチレンテレフタレート、ポリ(1,4-シクロヘキシレンジメチレンテレフタレート)、ポリエチレン-2,6-ナフタレートなどを挙げることができる。このうち、力学的物性やコストのバランスの点で、ポリエチレンテレフタレート又はポリエチレン-2,6-ナフタレートが特に好ましい。 The polyester used as the support in the present invention is a linear saturated polyester synthesized from an aromatic dibasic acid or an ester-forming derivative thereof and a diol or an ester-forming derivative thereof. Specific examples of such polyester include polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene isophthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, poly (1,4-cyclohexylenedimethylene terephthalate), polyethylene-2,6-naphthalate and the like. Of these, polyethylene terephthalate or polyethylene-2,6-naphthalate is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of balance between mechanical properties and cost.
 前記ポリエステルは、単独重合体であってもよいし、共重合体であってもよい。更に、前記ポリエステルに他の種類の樹脂、例えばポリイミド等を少量ブレンドしたものであってもよい。 The polyester may be a homopolymer or a copolymer. Further, the polyester may be blended with a small amount of another type of resin such as polyimide.
 本発明におけるポリエステルを重合する際には、カルボキシル基含量を所定の範囲以下に抑える観点から、Sb系、Ge系、Ti系の化合物を触媒として用いることが好ましく、中でも特にTi系化合物が好ましい。Ti系化合物を用いる場合、Ti系化合物をTi元素換算値が1ppm以上30ppm以下、より好ましくは3ppm以上15ppm以下の範囲となるように触媒として用いることにより重合する態様が好ましい。Ti系化合物の使用量がTi元素換算で前記範囲内であると、末端カルボキシル基を下記範囲に調整することが可能であり、ポリマー基材の耐加水分解性を低く保つことができる。 When polymerizing the polyester in the present invention, it is preferable to use an Sb-based, Ge-based or Ti-based compound as a catalyst from the viewpoint of keeping the carboxyl group content below a predetermined range, and among these, a Ti-based compound is particularly preferable. In the case of using a Ti-based compound, an embodiment is preferred in which the Ti-based compound is polymerized by using it as a catalyst so that the Ti element conversion value is in the range of 1 ppm to 30 ppm, more preferably 3 ppm to 15 ppm. When the amount of Ti compound used is within the above range in terms of Ti element, the terminal carboxyl group can be adjusted to the following range, and the hydrolysis resistance of the polymer substrate can be kept low.
 Ti系化合物を用いたポリエステルの合成には、例えば、特公平8-301198号公報、特許第2543624号、特許第3335683号、特許第3717380号、特許第3897756号、特許第3962226号、特許第3979866号、特許第3996871号、特許第4000867号、特許第4053837号、特許第4127119号、特許第4134710号、特許第4159154号、特許第4269704号、特許第4313538号等に記載の方法を適用できる。 Examples of the synthesis of polyester using a Ti compound include Japanese Patent Publication No. 8-301198, Japanese Patent No. 2543624, Japanese Patent No. 3335683, Japanese Patent No. 3717380, Japanese Patent No. 397756, Japanese Patent No. 39622626, and Japanese Patent No. 39786666. No. 3, Patent No. 3,996,871, Patent No. 40000867, Patent No. 4053837, Patent No. 4,127,119, Patent No. 4,134,710, Patent No. 4,159,154, Patent No. 4,269,704, Patent No. 4,313,538 and the like can be applied.
 ポリエステル中のカルボキシル基含量は50当量/t以下が好ましく、より好ましくは35当量/t以下である。カルボキシル基含量が50当量/t以下であると、耐加水分解性を保持し、湿熱経時したときの強度低下を小さく抑制することができる。カルボキシル基含量の下限は、ポリエステルに形成される層(例えば着色層)との間の接着性を保持する点で、2当量/tが望ましい。
 ポリエステル中のカルボキシル基含量は、重合触媒種、製膜条件(製膜温度や時間)により調整することが可能である。なお、本明細書中において、「当量/トン」は1トンあたりのモル当量を表す。
The carboxyl group content in the polyester is preferably 50 equivalents / t or less, more preferably 35 equivalents / t or less. When the carboxyl group content is 50 equivalents / t or less, hydrolysis resistance can be maintained, and a decrease in strength when subjected to wet heat aging can be suppressed to be small. The lower limit of the carboxyl group content is preferably 2 equivalents / t in terms of maintaining adhesion between the layer formed on the polyester (for example, a colored layer).
The carboxyl group content in the polyester can be adjusted by the polymerization catalyst species and the film forming conditions (film forming temperature and time). In the present specification, “equivalent / ton” represents a molar equivalent per ton.
 本発明におけるポリエステルは、重合後に固相重合されていることが好ましい。これにより、好ましいカルボキシル基含量を達成することができる。固相重合は、連続法(タワーの中に樹脂を充満させ、これを加熱しながらゆっくり所定の時間滞流させた後、送り出す方法)でもよいし、バッチ法(容器の中に樹脂を投入し、所定の時間加熱する方法)でもよい。具体的には、固相重合には、特許第2621563号、特許第3121876号、特許第3136774号、特許第3603585号、特許第3616522号、特許第3617340号、特許第3680523号、特許第3717392号、特許第4167159号等に記載の方法を適用することができる。 The polyester in the present invention is preferably solid-phase polymerized after polymerization. Thereby, a preferable carboxyl group content can be achieved. Solid-phase polymerization may be a continuous method (a method in which a tower is filled with a resin, which is slowly heated for a predetermined time and then sent out), or a batch method (a resin is charged into a container). , A method of heating for a predetermined time). Specifically, for solid phase polymerization, Japanese Patent No. 2621563, Japanese Patent No. 3121876, Japanese Patent No. 3136774, Japanese Patent No. 3603585, Japanese Patent No. 3616522, Japanese Patent No. 3617340, Japanese Patent No. 3680523, Japanese Patent No. 3717392 are disclosed. The method described in Japanese Patent No. 4167159 can be applied.
 固相重合の温度は、170℃以上240℃以下が好ましく、より好ましくは180℃以上230℃以下であり、さらに好ましくは190℃以上220℃以下である。また、固相重合時間は、5時間以上100時間以下が好ましく、より好ましくは10時間以上75時間以下であり、さらに好ましくは15時間以上50時間以下である。固相重合は、真空中あるいは窒素雰囲気下で行なうことが好ましい。 The temperature of the solid phase polymerization is preferably 170 ° C. or higher and 240 ° C. or lower, more preferably 180 ° C. or higher and 230 ° C. or lower, and further preferably 190 ° C. or higher and 220 ° C. or lower. The solid phase polymerization time is preferably 5 hours to 100 hours, more preferably 10 hours to 75 hours, and still more preferably 15 hours to 50 hours. The solid phase polymerization is preferably performed in a vacuum or in a nitrogen atmosphere.
 本発明におけるポリエステル基材は、例えば、上記のポリエステルをフィルム状に溶融押出を行なった後、キャスティングドラムで冷却固化させて未延伸フィルムとし、この未延伸フィルムをTg~(Tg+60)℃で長手方向に1回もしくは2回以上合計の倍率が3倍~6倍になるよう延伸し、その後Tg~(Tg+60)℃で幅方向に倍率が3~5倍になるように延伸した2軸延伸フィルムであることが好ましい。
 さらに、必要に応じて180~230℃で1~60秒間の熱処理を行なったものでもよい。 なお、Tgはガラス転移温度を表し、JIS K7121或いはASTM D3418-82等に基づいて測定することができる。例えば。本発明では、島津製作所社製の示差走査熱量測定装置(DSC)を用いて測定する。
 具体的には、試料としてポリエステル等のポリマーを10mg秤量し、アルミパンにセットし、昇温速度10℃/minで、室温から最終温度300℃まで昇温しながら、DSC装置で、温度に対する熱量を測定したとき、DSC曲線が屈曲する温度をガラス転移温度とした。
 
For example, the polyester base material in the present invention is obtained by melt-extruding the above polyester into a film shape and then cooling and solidifying it with a casting drum to form an unstretched film. The unstretched film is subjected to a longitudinal direction at Tg to (Tg + 60) ° C. A biaxially stretched film that has been stretched once or twice or so so that the total magnification is 3 to 6 times, and then stretched so that the magnification is 3 to 5 times in the width direction at Tg to (Tg + 60) ° C. Preferably there is.
Further, heat treatment may be performed at 180 to 230 ° C. for 1 to 60 seconds as necessary. Tg represents a glass transition temperature and can be measured based on JIS K7121 or ASTM D3418-82. For example. In the present invention, measurement is performed using a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation.
Specifically, 10 mg of a polymer such as polyester is weighed as a sample, set in an aluminum pan, and heated at a rate of temperature increase of 10 ° C./min from room temperature to a final temperature of 300 ° C., with a DSC device, the amount of heat relative to temperature Was measured as the glass transition temperature.
 ポリマー基材(特にポリエステル基材)の厚みは、25~300μm程度が好ましい。厚みは、25μm以上であると力学強度が良好であり、300μm以下であるとコスト的に有利である。
 特にポリエステル基材は、厚みが増すに伴なって耐加水分解性が悪化し、長期使用に耐えない傾向にあり、本発明においては、ポリエステル基材の厚みが120μm以上300μm以下であって、かつポリエステル中のカルボキシル基含量が2~50当量/tである場合に、より湿熱耐久性の向上効果が奏される。
The thickness of the polymer substrate (particularly the polyester substrate) is preferably about 25 to 300 μm. If the thickness is 25 μm or more, the mechanical strength is good, and if it is 300 μm or less, it is advantageous in terms of cost.
In particular, the polyester base material has a tendency to deteriorate the hydrolysis resistance as the thickness increases and cannot withstand long-term use. In the present invention, the thickness of the polyester base material is 120 μm or more and 300 μm or less, and When the content of the carboxyl group in the polyester is 2 to 50 equivalent / t, the effect of improving the wet heat durability is further exhibited.
~樹脂フィルムの作製~
 本発明の樹脂フィルムは、既述のようにポリマー層形成工程を設けて構成されるが、具体的な製造方法として、例えば、
(1)一般式(1)で表される化合物を含む油相を水溶性樹脂(例;PVA)を含む水相中に加えて乳化分散する工程と、
(2)前記乳化分散により得られたエマルションとフッ素系ポリマー及び/又はシリコーン系ポリマーと必要に応じて架橋剤や界面活性剤等とを含有し、好ましくは溶媒の50質量%以上が水である塗布液を調製する工程と、
(3)前記塗布液をポリマー基材(支持体)の少なくとも一方の表面に直接あるいは他の層を介して塗布する工程と、
(4)ポリマー基材上に塗布形成された塗布膜を乾燥させてポリマー層とする工程と、
を設けて構成することができる。
 ここで、ポリマー層を形成した後に、該ポリマー層を硬化させることによって、湿熱経時後の接着性を高めることができる。
 既述のように、易接着性層等の他の層を有している場合、上記の工程に加えて、他の層を形成するための工程をさらに設けることができる。他の層の形成態様の例としては、例えば、他の層を構成する成分を含有する塗布液を、ポリマー基材の上(例えばポリマー基材のポリマー層が形成されている側とは反対側)に塗布する方法が挙げられる。その例として、前記易接着性層及び前記着色層の形成方法として既述した方法が挙げられる。
-Production of resin film-
The resin film of the present invention is configured by providing a polymer layer forming step as described above. As a specific manufacturing method, for example,
(1) adding and emulsifying and dispersing an oil phase containing the compound represented by the general formula (1) in an aqueous phase containing a water-soluble resin (eg, PVA);
(2) Contains an emulsion obtained by the above emulsification dispersion, a fluorine-based polymer and / or a silicone-based polymer, and, if necessary, a crosslinking agent or a surfactant, and preferably 50% by mass or more of the solvent is water. A step of preparing a coating solution;
(3) a step of applying the coating solution directly or via another layer to at least one surface of the polymer substrate (support);
(4) a step of drying the coating film formed on the polymer substrate to form a polymer layer;
Can be provided.
Here, after forming the polymer layer, the adhesiveness after wet heat aging can be enhanced by curing the polymer layer.
As described above, when another layer such as an easy-adhesive layer is provided, a step for forming another layer can be further provided in addition to the above step. As an example of the formation mode of the other layer, for example, a coating liquid containing the components constituting the other layer is applied on the polymer substrate (for example, the side opposite to the side on which the polymer layer of the polymer substrate is formed). The method of apply | coating is mentioned. Examples thereof include the methods described above as the method for forming the easily adhesive layer and the colored layer.
 本発明の樹脂フィルムは、太陽電池用バックシートの用途に好適に用いられる。
 太陽電池用バックシートの具体例として、(1)ポリマー基材の一方の側にポリマー層が塗設され、ポリマー層が塗設された側とは反対の他方の側に白色顔料を含有する反射層(及び易接着性層)が塗設されたもの、(2)ポリマー基材の一方の側にポリマー層が塗設され、ポリマー層が塗設された側とは反対の他方の側に着色顔料を含有する着色層が塗設されたもの等を挙げることができる。
 また、反射層や易接着性層等の他の形成態様の例として、所望の機能を有する層を1層又は2層以上有するシートやフィルムを、ポリマー基材のポリマー層が塗設されていない他方の側(被形成面)に貼合する方法が挙げられる。この場合のシートやフィルムは、他の層を1層又は2層以上有するシートやフィルムである。具体的には、ポリマー基材の一方の側にポリマー層が塗布形成されており、該ポリマー層が形成された側とは反対側の他方の側に、白色顔料(又は白色以外の着色顔料)を含有する白色フィルム(又は着色フィルム)を貼合したもの、同様に他方の側にアルミニウム薄膜と白色顔料を含有する白色フィルムを貼合したもの、同様に他方の側に無機バリア層を有するポリマーフィルムと白色顔料を含有する白色フィルムを貼合したもの、等が挙げられる。
The resin film of this invention is used suitably for the use of the solar cell backsheet.
Specific examples of solar cell backsheets include: (1) A reflection containing a polymer layer on one side of a polymer substrate and a white pigment on the other side opposite to the side on which the polymer layer is coated (2) A polymer layer is coated on one side of the polymer substrate, and the other side opposite to the side on which the polymer layer is coated is colored The thing etc. which the colored layer containing a pigment was coated can be mentioned.
Moreover, as an example of other formation modes, such as a reflective layer and an easily-adhesive layer, the polymer layer of the polymer base material is not coated with a sheet or film having one or more layers having a desired function. The method of bonding to the other side (formation surface) is mentioned. The sheet or film in this case is a sheet or film having one or more other layers. Specifically, a polymer layer is applied and formed on one side of a polymer substrate, and a white pigment (or a colored pigment other than white) is formed on the other side opposite to the side on which the polymer layer is formed. A white film (or a colored film) containing a polymer, a white film containing an aluminum thin film and a white pigment on the other side, and a polymer having an inorganic barrier layer on the other side. What stuck the white film containing a film and a white pigment, etc. are mentioned.
 また、支持体として用いるポリマー支持体が2軸延伸フィルムである場合、2軸延伸した後のポリマー基材にポリマー層形成用の塗布液を塗布してもよいし、又は1軸延伸後のポリマー基材にポリマー層形成用の塗布液を塗布し乾燥させた後、1軸延伸の方向と異なる方向に延伸するようにしてもよい。更には、未延伸のポリマー支持体に塗布液を塗布し乾燥させた後、2方向に延伸するようにしてもよい。 Moreover, when the polymer support used as a support is a biaxially stretched film, a coating solution for forming a polymer layer may be applied to the polymer substrate after biaxial stretching, or the polymer after uniaxial stretching After the coating liquid for forming the polymer layer is applied to the substrate and dried, it may be stretched in a direction different from the direction of uniaxial stretching. Further, the coating solution may be applied to an unstretched polymer support and dried, and then stretched in two directions.
 以下、本発明を実施例により更に具体的に説明するが、本発明はその主旨を越えない限り、以下の実施例に限定されるものではない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」は質量基準である。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to examples. However, the present invention is not limited to the following examples as long as the gist thereof is not exceeded. Unless otherwise specified, “part” is based on mass.
(実施例1)
-支持体の作製-
(1)ポリエステルの合成
 高純度テレフタル酸(三井化学(株)製)100kgとエチレングリコール(日本触媒(株)製)45kgのスラリーを、予めビス(ヒドロキシエチル)テレフタレート約123kgが仕込まれ、温度250℃、圧力1.2×10Paに保持されたエステル化反応槽に、4時間かけて順次供給し、供給終了後もさらに1時間かけてエステル化反応を行なった。その後、得られたエステル化反応生成物123kgを重縮合反応槽に移送した。
Example 1
-Fabrication of support-
(1) Synthesis of polyester A slurry of 100 kg of high-purity terephthalic acid (manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals) and 45 kg of ethylene glycol (manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.) was charged with about 123 kg of bis (hydroxyethyl) terephthalate in advance and the temperature was 250 The esterification reaction tank maintained at a temperature of 1.2 ° C. and a pressure of 1.2 × 10 5 Pa was sequentially supplied over 4 hours, and the esterification reaction was carried out over an additional hour after the completion of the supply. Thereafter, 123 kg of the obtained esterification reaction product was transferred to a polycondensation reaction tank.
 引き続いて、エステル化反応生成物が移送された重縮合反応槽に、エチレングリコールを、得られるポリマーに対して0.3質量%添加した。5分間撹拌した後、酢酸コバルト及び酢酸マンガンのエチレングリコール溶液を、得られるポリマーに対してコバルト元素換算値が30ppm、マンガン元素換算が15ppmとなるように加えた。更に5分間撹拌した後、チタンアルコキシド化合物の2質量%エチレングリコール溶液を、得られるポリマーに対してチタン元素換算値が5ppmとなるように添加した。前記チタンアルコキシド化合物には、特開2005-340616号公報の段落番号[0083]の実施例1で合成しているチタンアルコキシド化合物(Ti含有量=4.44質量%)を用いた。その5分後、ジエチルホスホノ酢酸エチルの10質量%エチレングリコール溶液を、得られるポリマーに対して5ppmとなるように添加した。 Subsequently, 0.3% by mass of ethylene glycol was added to the resulting polymer in the polycondensation reaction tank to which the esterification reaction product had been transferred. After stirring for 5 minutes, an ethylene glycol solution of cobalt acetate and manganese acetate was added to the obtained polymer so that the cobalt element conversion value was 30 ppm and the manganese element conversion value was 15 ppm. After further stirring for 5 minutes, a 2% by mass ethylene glycol solution of a titanium alkoxide compound was added to the obtained polymer so that the titanium element equivalent value was 5 ppm. As the titanium alkoxide compound, the titanium alkoxide compound (Ti content = 4.44 mass%) synthesized in Example 1 of paragraph No. [0083] of JP-A-2005-340616 was used. Five minutes later, a 10% by mass ethylene glycol solution of ethyl diethylphosphonoacetate was added so as to be 5 ppm with respect to the resulting polymer.
 その後、低重合体を30rpmで攪拌しながら、反応系を250℃から285℃まで徐々に昇温するとともに、圧力を40Paまで下げた。最終温度、最終圧力に到達するまでの時間はともに60分とした。そのまま3時間反応を続け、その後反応系を窒素パージし、常圧に戻して重縮合反応を停止した。そして、得られたポリマー溶融物を冷水にストランド状に吐出し、直ちにカッティングしてポリマーのペレット(直径約3mm、長さ約7mm)を作製した。 Thereafter, while the low polymer was stirred at 30 rpm, the reaction system was gradually heated from 250 ° C. to 285 ° C. and the pressure was reduced to 40 Pa. The time to reach the final temperature and final pressure was both 60 minutes. The reaction was continued for 3 hours, and then the reaction system was purged with nitrogen and returned to normal pressure to stop the polycondensation reaction. Then, the obtained polymer melt was discharged into cold water in a strand form and immediately cut to produce polymer pellets (diameter: about 3 mm, length: about 7 mm).
(2)固相重合
 上記で得られたペレットを、40Paに保たれた真空容器中、220℃の温度で30時間保持して、固相重合を行なった。
(2) Solid phase polymerization The pellets obtained above were held in a vacuum vessel maintained at 40 Pa at a temperature of 220 ° C for 30 hours to perform solid phase polymerization.
(3)ベース形成
 以上のように固相重合を経た後のペレットを、280℃で溶融押出して金属ドラムの上にキャストし、厚さ約2.5mmの未延伸ベースを作製した。その後、90℃で縦方向に3倍に延伸し、更に120℃で横方向に3.3倍に延伸した。さらに215℃で1分間、熱固定を行なって、厚み250μmの2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレート支持体(以下、単に「PET支持体」と称する。)を得た。
(3) Base formation The pellets after undergoing solid-phase polymerization as described above were melt-extruded at 280 ° C. and cast on a metal drum to produce an unstretched base having a thickness of about 2.5 mm. Thereafter, the film was stretched 3 times in the longitudinal direction at 90 ° C., and further stretched 3.3 times in the transverse direction at 120 ° C. Furthermore, heat setting was performed at 215 ° C. for 1 minute to obtain a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate support (hereinafter simply referred to as “PET support”) having a thickness of 250 μm.
-下塗り層-
(1)下塗り層形成用塗布液の調製
 下記組成中の各成分を混合し、下塗り層形成用塗布液を調製した。
 <塗布液の組成>
・ポリエステル系バインダー      ・・・48.0部 
 (バイロナールDM1245、東洋紡(株)製、固形分:30質量%)
・カルボジイミド化合物(架橋剤)   ・・・10.0部
 (カルボジライトV-02-L2、日清紡績(株)製、固形分:10質量%)
・オキサゾリン化合物(架橋剤)    ・・・3.0部
 (エポクロスWS700、(株)日本触媒製、固形分:25質量%)
・界面活性剤             ・・・15.0部
 (ナロアクティーCL95、三洋化成工業(株)製、固形分:1質量%)
・蒸留水               ・・・924.0部
-Undercoat layer-
(1) Preparation of coating solution for forming undercoat layer Each component in the following composition was mixed to prepare a coating solution for forming an undercoat layer.
<Composition of coating solution>
・ Polyester binder: 48.0 parts
(Byronal DM1245, manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., solid content: 30% by mass)
Carbodiimide compound (crosslinking agent) 10.0 parts (Carbodilite V-02-L2, manufactured by Nisshinbo Industries, Ltd., solid content: 10% by mass)
Oxazoline compound (crosslinking agent) 3.0 parts (Epocross WS700, manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd., solid content: 25% by mass)
Surfactant: 15.0 parts (Naroacty CL95, manufactured by Sanyo Chemical Industries, solid content: 1% by mass)
・ Distilled water ... 924.0 parts
(2)下塗り層の形成
 得られた下塗り層形成用塗布液をPET支持体の一方の面に、バインダー量が塗布量で0.1g/mになるように塗布し、180℃で1分間乾燥させて、乾燥厚みが約0.1μmの下塗り層を形成した。
(2) Formation of undercoat layer The obtained undercoat layer-forming coating solution was applied to one surface of a PET support so that the amount of the binder was 0.1 g / m 2 and applied at 180 ° C for 1 minute. An undercoat layer having a dry thickness of about 0.1 μm was formed by drying.
-着色層-
(1)二酸化チタン分散物の調製
 下記組成中の成分を混合し、その混合物をダイノミル型分散機により1時間、分散処理を施した。
 <二酸化チタン分散物の組成>
・二酸化チタン(体積平均粒子径=0.42μm)・・・39.9質量%
 (タイペークR-780-2、石原産業(株)製、固形分100質量%)
・ポリビニルアルコール            ・・・49.9質量%
 (PVA-105、(株)クラレ製、固形分:10質量%)
・界面活性剤                 ・・・0.5質量%
 (デモールEP、花王(株)製、固形分:10質量%)
・蒸留水                   ・・・9.7質量%
-Colored layer-
(1) Preparation of Titanium Dioxide Dispersion Components in the following composition were mixed, and the mixture was subjected to dispersion treatment for 1 hour using a dynomill type disperser.
<Composition of titanium dioxide dispersion>
・ Titanium dioxide (volume average particle size = 0.42 μm) 39.9% by mass
(Taipeke R-780-2, manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd., solid content 100% by mass)
・ Polyvinyl alcohol: 49.9% by mass
(PVA-105, manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd., solid content: 10% by mass)
・ Surfactant ... 0.5% by mass
(Demol EP, manufactured by Kao Corporation, solid content: 10% by mass)
・ Distilled water: 9.7% by mass
(2)着色層用塗布液の調製
 下記組成中の成分を混合し、着色層用塗布液を調製した。
 <塗布液の組成>
・前記二酸化チタン分散物          ・・・800.0部
・ポリオレフィンバインダー         ・・・108.0部
 (アローベースSE1010、ユニチカ(株)製、固形分:20質量%)
・ポリオキシアルキレンアルキルエーテル   ・・・30.0部
 (ナロアクティーCL95、三洋化成工業(株)製、固形分:1質量%)
・オキサゾリン化合物            ・・・20.0部
 (エポクロスWS-700、日本触媒(株)製、固形分:25%;架橋剤)
・蒸留水                  ・・・42.0部
(2) Preparation of colored layer coating solution Components in the following composition were mixed to prepare a colored layer coating solution.
<Composition of coating solution>
・ Titanium dioxide dispersion: 800.0 parts ・ Polyolefin binder: 108.0 parts (Arrow Base SE1010, manufactured by Unitika Ltd., solid content: 20% by mass)
Polyoxyalkylene alkyl ether 30.0 parts (Naroacty CL95, manufactured by Sanyo Chemical Industries, solid content: 1% by mass)
Oxazoline compound: 20.0 parts (Epocross WS-700, manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd., solid content: 25%; crosslinking agent)
・ Distilled water ... 42.0 parts
(3)着色層の形成
 得られた塗布液を、前記PET支持体上に形成された下塗り層の上に塗布し、180℃で1分間乾燥させて、着色層として、二酸化チタン量が8.0g/m、バインダー量が1.5g/mの反射層を形成した。
(3) Formation of colored layer The obtained coating solution is applied on the undercoat layer formed on the PET support and dried at 180 ° C. for 1 minute, and the amount of titanium dioxide is 8. A reflective layer having 0 g / m 2 and a binder amount of 1.5 g / m 2 was formed.
-裏面層1-
(1)化合物(A)の分散物の調製
 酢酸エチル35.4gとテトラヒドロフラン8.8gとを混合した混合溶媒に、下記化合物(A-1)(既述の一般式(1)で表される化合物)18.9gを添加し、50℃に加熱して10分間攪拌し、化合物(A-1)が溶解した油相液を調製した。
-Back layer 1-
(1) Preparation of Dispersion of Compound (A) In a mixed solvent obtained by mixing 35.4 g of ethyl acetate and 8.8 g of tetrahydrofuran, the following compound (A-1) (represented by the general formula (1) described above) Compound (18.9 g) was added, heated to 50 ° C. and stirred for 10 minutes to prepare an oil phase solution in which compound (A-1) was dissolved.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014

 
 続いて、400ccのステンレス容器に蒸留水112gを添加し、90℃に加熱した後、クラレポバールPVA-205(ポリビニルアルコール、(株)クラレ製)16gを添加し、90℃で3時間攪拌し溶解させ、水相液を調製した。 Subsequently, 112 g of distilled water was added to a 400 cc stainless steel container and heated to 90 ° C., and then 16 g of Kuraray Poval PVA-205 (polyvinyl alcohol, manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd.) was added and dissolved by stirring at 90 ° C. for 3 hours. To prepare an aqueous phase solution.
 続いて、得られた水相液をディゾルバーを用いて500rpmで攪拌しながら、上記の油相液を添加した。添加後、更に5分間攪拌を続けて均一状の混合液とした。ここで得られた混合液(25℃)を、さらにディゾルバーを用いて20,000rpmで10分間、25℃を維持して攪拌し、乳化物(エマルション)1を得た。得られた乳化物1の平均粒子径を、レーザー解析/散乱式粒子径分布測定装置LA950〔(株)堀場製作所製〕により測定したところ、メジアン径で120nmであった。 Subsequently, the oil phase liquid was added while stirring the obtained aqueous phase liquid at 500 rpm using a dissolver. After the addition, stirring was continued for another 5 minutes to obtain a uniform mixed solution. The resulting mixed liquid (25 ° C.) was further stirred using a dissolver at 20,000 rpm for 10 minutes at 25 ° C. to obtain an emulsion (emulsion) 1. The average particle size of the obtained emulsion 1 was measured by a laser analysis / scattering particle size distribution measuring apparatus LA950 (manufactured by Horiba, Ltd.), and the median size was 120 nm.
 乳化物1からエバポレーターを用いて有機溶剤を留去し、分散物1を得た。残留した有機溶剤の量をガスクロマトグラフィによって測定したところ、0.7質量%以下であった。また、化合物A-1の分散物1中における濃度は、13質量%であった。分散物1の平均粒子径を上記と同様の方法で測定したところ、メジアン径で121nmであった。 The organic solvent was distilled off from the emulsion 1 using an evaporator to obtain a dispersion 1. The amount of the remaining organic solvent was measured by gas chromatography and found to be 0.7% by mass or less. The concentration of Compound A-1 in Dispersion 1 was 13% by mass. When the average particle diameter of Dispersion 1 was measured by the same method as described above, the median diameter was 121 nm.
(2)裏面層1形成用塗布液の調製
 下記組成中の各成分を混合し、裏面層1形成用塗布液を調製した。
 <塗布液の組成>
・アクリル/シリコーン系バインダー(バインダーB-1)・・・400.0部
 (セラネートWSA-1070、DIC(株)製、固形分:40質量%)
・カルボジイミド化合物(架橋剤)           ・・・48.0部
 (カルボジライトV-02-L2、日清紡績(株)製、固形分:40質量%)
・界面活性剤                     ・・・9.8部
 (ナロアクティーCL95、三洋化成工業(株)製、固形分:1質量%)
・前記化合物A-1の分散物              ・・・428.6部
 (化合物A-1の含有比=14質量%)
・蒸留水                       ・・・113.6部
(2) Preparation of coating solution for forming back layer 1 Each component in the following composition was mixed to prepare a coating solution for forming back layer 1.
<Composition of coating solution>
Acrylic / silicone binder (Binder B-1) 400.0 parts (Ceranate WSA-1070, manufactured by DIC Corporation, solid content: 40% by mass)
-Carbodiimide compound (crosslinking agent) 48.0 parts (Carbodilite V-02-L2, manufactured by Nisshinbo Co., Ltd., solid content: 40% by mass)
Surfactant: 9.8 parts (Naroacty CL95, manufactured by Sanyo Chemical Industries, solid content: 1% by mass)
-Dispersion of the compound A-1 428.6 parts (content ratio of the compound A-1 = 14% by mass)
・ Distilled water ... 113.6 parts
(3)裏面層1の形成
 得られた裏面層1形成用塗布液を、PET支持体の反射層が形成された側と反対側の支持体表面に、バインダー塗布量が3.0g/m、化合物A-1の塗布量が1.1g/mとなるように塗布し、180℃で1分間乾燥させて、乾燥厚みが約3μmの裏面層1(ポリマー層)を形成した。
(3) Formation of Back Layer 1 The obtained coating solution for forming the back layer 1 is coated with a binder coating amount of 3.0 g / m 2 on the support surface opposite to the side on which the reflective layer of the PET support is formed. Then, the compound A-1 was applied in an amount of 1.1 g / m 2 and dried at 180 ° C. for 1 minute to form a back layer 1 (polymer layer) having a dry thickness of about 3 μm.
 以上のようにして、PET支持体の両面に塗布により各層が形成されたバックシート試料を作製した。 As described above, a backsheet sample in which each layer was formed by coating on both sides of a PET support was produced.
-太陽電池モジュールの作製-
 厚さ3mmの強化ガラスと、EVAシート〔SC50B、三井化学ファブロ(株)製〕と、結晶系太陽電池セルと、EVAシート〔SC50B、三井化学ファブロ(株)製〕と、上記のように作製し、下記評価「4.接着性」の「(B)湿熱経時後の接着性」と同様の処理を行なった後のバックシート試料とをこの順に重ね、真空ラミネータ〔日清紡(株)製、真空ラミネート機〕を用いてホットプレスすることにより接着させた。但し、バックシート試料は、その着色層の表面がEVAシートと接触するように配置した。また、接着は、真空ラミネータにより、128℃で3分間の真空引きの後、2分間加圧して仮接着し、さらにドライオーブンにて150℃で30分間本接着処理する条件にて行なった。このようにして、結晶系の太陽電池モジュールを作製した。
 作製した太陽電池モジュールを用いて発電運転を行なったところ、太陽電池として良好な発電性能を示した。
-Fabrication of solar cell module-
A tempered glass having a thickness of 3 mm, an EVA sheet [SC50B, manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals, Inc.], a crystalline solar cell, and an EVA sheet [SC50B, manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals, Inc.], manufactured as described above. The back sheet samples after the same treatment as “(B) Adhesion after wet heat aging” in the following evaluation “4. Adhesiveness” were stacked in this order, and a vacuum laminator [manufactured by Nisshinbo Co., Ltd., vacuum It was bonded by hot pressing using a laminating machine. However, the back sheet sample was arranged so that the surface of the colored layer was in contact with the EVA sheet. Adhesion was performed under the condition that a vacuum laminator was evacuated at 128 ° C. for 3 minutes, then pressure-bonded for 2 minutes to perform temporary adhesion, and further in a dry oven at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes. In this way, a crystalline solar cell module was produced.
When power generation operation was performed using the produced solar cell module, it showed good power generation performance as a solar cell.
(実施例2~10)
 実施例1において、化合物A-1の濃度及び塗布量、バインダー濃度について下記表1に示す変更を施したこと以外、実施例1と同様にして、バックシート試料を作製し、評価すると共に、太陽電池モジュールを作製した。評価結果は下記表1に示す。
(Examples 2 to 10)
In Example 1, a backsheet sample was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the concentration and coating amount of Compound A-1, and the binder concentration were changed as shown in Table 1 below. A battery module was produced. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 below.
(実施例11~14、比較例1~3)
 実施例8において、裏面層1形成用塗布液の調製に用いた化合物A-1を、以下に示す化合物A-2~A-5、A-101~A-103に変更したこと以外、実施例8と同様にして、バックシート試料を作製し、評価すると共に、太陽電池モジュールを作製した。評価結果は下記表1に示す。
(Examples 11 to 14, Comparative Examples 1 to 3)
In Example 8, except that the compound A-1 used for the preparation of the coating solution for forming the back layer 1 was changed to the following compounds A-2 to A-5 and A-101 to A-103. In the same manner as in Example 8, a backsheet sample was prepared and evaluated, and a solar cell module was prepared. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015

 
(実施例15)
 実施例8において、PET支持体の反射層が設けられた側とは反対側の面に形成された裏面層1(ポリマー層)の表面に、以下に示す手順にしたがって、裏面層2形成用塗布液を塗布することによりさらに裏面層2(保護ポリマー層)を形成したこと以外は、実施例8と同様にして、バックシート試料を作製し、評価すると共に、太陽電池モジュールを作製した。評価結果は下記表1に示す。
(Example 15)
In Example 8, on the surface of the back layer 1 (polymer layer) formed on the surface opposite to the side on which the reflective layer of the PET support is provided, the back layer 2 forming application is performed according to the following procedure. A backsheet sample was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 8 except that the back layer 2 (protective polymer layer) was further formed by applying the liquid, and a solar cell module was prepared. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 below.
-裏面層2の形成-
(1)裏面層2形成用塗布液の調製
 下記組成中の各成分を混合し、裏面層2形成用塗布液を調製した。
 <塗布液の組成>
・アクリル/シリコーン系バインダー(バインダーB-1)・・・362.3部
 (セラネートWSA-1070、DIC(株)製、固形分:40質量%)
・カルボジイミド化合物(架橋剤)           ・・・24.2部
 (カルボジライトV-02-L2、日清紡績(株)製、固形分:40質量%)
・界面活性剤                     ・・・24.2部
 (ナロアクティーCL95、三洋化成工業(株)製、固形分:1質量%)
・蒸留水                       ・・・589.3部
-Formation of back layer 2-
(1) Preparation of coating solution for forming back layer 2 Each component in the following composition was mixed to prepare a coating solution for forming back layer 2.
<Composition of coating solution>
Acrylic / silicone binder (Binder B-1): 362.3 parts (Ceranate WSA-1070, manufactured by DIC Corporation, solid content: 40% by mass)
Carbodiimide compound (crosslinking agent) 24.2 parts (Carbodilite V-02-L2, manufactured by Nisshinbo Co., Ltd., solid content: 40% by mass)
-Surfactant ... 24.2 parts (Naroacty CL95, manufactured by Sanyo Chemical Industries, solid content: 1% by mass)
・ Distilled water ... 589.3 parts
(2)裏面層2の形成
 得られた裏面層2形成用塗布液を裏面層1の上に、バインダー塗布量が2.0g/mになるように#10のメイヤーバーで塗布した後、180℃で1分間乾燥させて、保護ポリマー層として、乾燥厚み約2μmの裏面層2を形成した。このようにして、PET支持体の両面の各層が、塗布による塗布層として設けられたバックシート試料を作製した。
(2) Formation of Back Layer 2 After coating the obtained back layer 2 forming coating solution on the back layer 1 with a # 10 Meyer bar so that the binder coating amount is 2.0 g / m 2 , It dried at 180 degreeC for 1 minute, and formed the back surface layer 2 with a dry thickness of about 2 micrometers as a protective polymer layer. In this way, a backsheet sample was prepared in which each layer on both sides of the PET support was provided as a coating layer by coating.
(実施例16~19)
 実施例15において、裏面層1のバインダー種又は紫外線吸収剤種を下記表1に示すように変更したこと以外、実施例15と同様にして、バックシート試料を作製し、評価すると共に、太陽電池モジュールを作製した。評価結果は下記表1に示す。
(Examples 16 to 19)
In Example 15, a backsheet sample was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 15 except that the binder type or ultraviolet absorber type of the back layer 1 was changed as shown in Table 1 below. A module was produced. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 below.
(評価)
 上記の実施例及び比較例で作製したバックシート試料について、下記の評価を行なった。評価結果は、下記表1に示す。
(Evaluation)
The following evaluation was performed on the backsheet samples prepared in the above examples and comparative examples. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1 below.
-1.耐光性-
 日本電色工業(株)製の分光式色差計「Spectro Color Meter SE2000」を用いて、各バックシート試料のYI値(YI-1)を測定した。その後、各バックシート試料に対し、岩崎電気(株)製の耐光性試験機「アイスーパーUVテスター W-151」を用い、照度900W/mで48時間、紫外光を照射した。但し、紫外光照射時における環境条件は、63℃、50%RHとした。
 次いで、上記同様の分光式色差計(Spectro Color Meter SE2000、日本電色工業(株)製)を用い、再び各バックシート試料のYI値(YI-2)を測定した。
 測定した値から、YI=(YI-2)-(YI-1)を求め、各バックシート試料の着色の度合いを示す指標とし、YI値をもとに、下記評価基準にしたがってランク付けした。このうち、ランク3~5が実用上許容可能な範囲である。
 <評価基準>
5:YI値が3未満であった。
4:YI値が3以上5未満であった。
3:YI値が5以上10未満であった。
2:YI値が10以上20未満であった。
1:YI値が20以上であった。
-1. Light resistance
The YI value (YI-1) of each backsheet sample was measured using a spectroscopic color difference meter “Spectro Color Meter SE2000” manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd. Thereafter, each backsheet sample was irradiated with ultraviolet light at an illuminance of 900 W / m 2 for 48 hours using a light resistance tester “I Super UV Tester W-151” manufactured by Iwasaki Electric Co., Ltd. However, environmental conditions at the time of ultraviolet light irradiation were 63 ° C. and 50% RH.
Subsequently, the YI value (YI-2) of each backsheet sample was measured again using the same spectral color difference meter (Spectro Color Meter SE2000, manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd.).
YI = (YI−2) − (YI−1) was determined from the measured values, and was used as an index indicating the degree of coloring of each backsheet sample, and was ranked according to the following evaluation criteria based on the YI value. Of these, ranks 3 to 5 are practically acceptable.
<Evaluation criteria>
5: YI value was less than 3.
4: YI value was 3 or more and less than 5.
3: YI value was 5 or more and less than 10.
2: YI value was 10 or more and less than 20.
1: YI value was 20 or more.
-2.破断伸び保持率-
 各バックシート試料について、以下の測定方法により得られた破断伸びの測定値L及びLに基づいて、下記式より破断伸び保持率[%]を算出した。実用上許容できる破断伸び保持率の範囲は50%以上である。
   破断伸び保持率[%]=(L/L)×100
 <破断伸びの測定方法>
 バックシート試料を幅10mm×長さ200mmに裁断し、測定用の試料A及び試料Bを用意した。試料Aに対して、25℃、60%RHの雰囲気で24時間調湿を施した後、試料Aをテンシロン(ORIENTEC製、RTC-1210A)にて上下クリップに挟み、剥離角度180°、引っ張り速度300mm/分で引っ張り試験を行なった。なお、引っ張り試験は、延伸される試料Aの長さを10cm、引っ張り速度を20mm/分として行なった。この試験で得られた試料Aの破断伸びをLとする。
 別途、試料Bに対して、120℃、100%RHの雰囲気で50時間湿熱処理を施した後、試料Aと同様にして引っ張り試験を行なった。このときの試料Bの破断伸びをLとする。
-2. Breaking elongation retention rate-
Each backsheet sample, based on the measured value L 0 and L 1 of breaking elongation obtained by the following measurement method was calculated elongation at break retention by the following formula [%]. The range of practically acceptable breaking elongation retention is 50% or more.
Elongation at break [%] = (L 1 / L 0 ) × 100
<Method for measuring elongation at break>
The back sheet sample was cut into a width of 10 mm and a length of 200 mm to prepare a sample A and a sample B for measurement. After subjecting sample A to humidity control at 25 ° C. and 60% RH for 24 hours, sample A was sandwiched between upper and lower clips with Tensilon (produced by ORIENTEC, RTC-1210A), peeling angle 180 °, pulling speed A tensile test was performed at 300 mm / min. In the tensile test, the length of the sample A to be stretched was 10 cm, and the tensile speed was 20 mm / min. The elongation at break of the sample A obtained in this study and L 0.
Separately, the sample B was subjected to a wet heat treatment in an atmosphere of 120 ° C. and 100% RH for 50 hours, and then a tensile test was performed in the same manner as the sample A. The elongation at break of Sample B at this time is L 1.
-3.塗布面状-
 バックシート試料の塗布面状を目視と光学顕微鏡とにより観察し、下記の評価基準にしたがって評価した。なお、光学顕微鏡は、倍率50倍とし、バックシート試料表面の20mm×50mmの範囲を観察した。なお、ランク3以上が実用上許容される範囲である。
 <評価基準>
5:ムラや紫外線吸収剤の凝集が全くみられなかった。
4:ムラが極僅かにみられたが、紫外線吸収剤の凝集は確認できなかった。
3:ムラがみられたが、紫外線吸収剤の凝集は確認できなかった。
2:ムラがはっきり確認され、紫外線吸収剤の凝集が10個/m未満みられた。
1:ムラがはっきり確認され、紫外線吸収剤の凝集が10個/m以上みられた。
-3. Coating surface-
The applied surface of the backsheet sample was observed visually and with an optical microscope, and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The optical microscope had a magnification of 50 times, and an area of 20 mm × 50 mm on the backsheet sample surface was observed. Note that rank 3 or higher is a practically allowable range.
<Evaluation criteria>
5: No unevenness or aggregation of the UV absorber was observed.
4: Although slight unevenness was observed, aggregation of the ultraviolet absorber could not be confirmed.
3: Unevenness was observed, but aggregation of the UV absorber could not be confirmed.
2: Unevenness was clearly confirmed, and aggregation of the UV absorber was observed to be less than 10 / m 2 .
1: Unevenness was clearly confirmed, and aggregation of ultraviolet absorbers was observed at 10 pieces / m 2 or more.
-4.接着性-
[A]湿熱経時前の接着性
 各バックシート試料を20mm巾×150mmにカットして、サンプル片を2枚準備した。この2枚のサンプル片を、互いに反射層側が内側になるように配置し、その間に20mm巾×100mm長にカットしたEVAシート(三井化学ファブロ(株)製のEVAシート:SC50B)を挟み、真空ラミネータ(日清紡(株)製の真空ラミネート機)を用いてホットプレスすることにより、EVAと接着させた。このときの接着条件は、以下の通りとした。
 真空ラミネータを用いて、128℃で3分間の真空引き後、2分間加圧して仮接着した。その後、ドライオーブンで150℃で30分間、本接着処理を施した。このようにして、互いに接着した2枚のサンプル片の一端から20mmの部分はEVAと未接着で、残りの100mmの部分にEVAシートが接着された接着評価用試料を得た。
-4. Adhesiveness-
[A] Adhesiveness before wet heat aging Each backsheet sample was cut into a width of 20 mm × 150 mm to prepare two sample pieces. These two sample pieces are arranged so that the reflection layer side is inside, and an EVA sheet (EVA sheet manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals Fabro Co., Ltd .: SC50B) cut between 20 mm width × 100 mm length is sandwiched between them It was made to adhere to EVA by hot pressing using a laminator (vacuum laminator manufactured by Nisshinbo Co., Ltd.). The bonding conditions at this time were as follows.
Using a vacuum laminator, evacuation was performed at 128 ° C. for 3 minutes, and then pressure was applied for 2 minutes to temporarily bond. Thereafter, the main adhesion treatment was performed in a dry oven at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes. In this way, a sample for adhesion evaluation was obtained in which the 20 mm portion from one end of the two sample pieces adhered to each other was not bonded to EVA, and the EVA sheet was bonded to the remaining 100 mm portion.
 得られた接着評価用試料のEVA未接着部分を、テンシロン(ORIENTEC製、RTC-1210A)にて上下クリップに挟み、剥離角度180°、引っ張り速度300mm/分で引っ張り試験を行ない、接着力を測定した。
 測定された接着力をもとに以下の評価基準にしたがってランク付けした。評価ランク4、5が実用上許容可能な範囲である。
 <評価基準>
5:密着が非常に良好であった(60N/20mm以上)。
4:密着は良好であった(30N/20mm以上60N/20mm未満)。
3:密着がやや不良であった(20N/20mm以上30N/20mm未満)。
2:密着不良が生じた(10N/20mm以上20N/20mm未満)。
1:密着不良が顕著であった(10N/20mm未満)。
The EVA non-bonded portion of the obtained sample for adhesion evaluation is sandwiched between upper and lower clips with Tensilon (ORITCTEC, RTC-1210A), and a tensile test is performed at a peeling angle of 180 ° and a pulling speed of 300 mm / min to measure the adhesive strength. did.
Based on the measured adhesive strength, ranking was performed according to the following evaluation criteria. Evaluation ranks 4 and 5 are practically acceptable ranges.
<Evaluation criteria>
5: Adhesion was very good (60 N / 20 mm or more).
4: Adhesion was good (30 N / 20 mm or more and less than 60 N / 20 mm).
3: Adhesion was slightly poor (20 N / 20 mm or more and less than 30 N / 20 mm).
2: Adhesion failure occurred (10 N / 20 mm or more and less than 20 N / 20 mm).
1: The adhesion failure was remarkable (less than 10 N / 20 mm).
[B]湿熱経時後の接着性
 上記で得た接着評価用試料を、120℃、100%RHの環境条件下で48時間保持(湿熱経時)した後、前記[A]と同様の方法にて接着力を測定した。測定された保持後の接着力について、同じ接着評価用試料の前記[A]湿熱経時前の接着力に対する比率〔%;=湿熱経時後の接着力/[A]湿熱経時前の接着力×100〕を算出した。また、測定された湿熱経時後の接着力をもとに、前記[A]と同様の方法にて接着力を評価した。
[B] Adhesiveness after wet heat aging The sample for adhesion evaluation obtained above was held for 48 hours (wet heat aging) at 120 ° C. and 100% RH, and then the same method as in [A] above. The adhesive force was measured. For the measured adhesion strength after holding, the ratio of the same adhesion evaluation sample to [A] adhesion strength before wet heat aging [%; = adhesion strength after wet heat aging / [A] adhesive strength before wet heat aging × 100 ] Was calculated. Moreover, based on the measured adhesive strength after wet heat aging, the adhesive strength was evaluated by the same method as in the above [A].
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000016

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000016

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017

 
 前記表1に示すように、実施例では、既述の一般式(1)で表される化合物を用いない比較例に比べ、良好な耐光性を示した。 As shown in Table 1, in the examples, better light resistance was exhibited as compared with the comparative example in which the compound represented by the general formula (1) was not used.
 本発明の具体的態様の前記記述は、記述と説明の目的で提供するものである。開示された、まさにその形態に本発明を限定することを企図するものでもなく、或いは網羅的なものを企図するものでもない。明らかに、当業者が多くの修飾や変形をすることができることは自明である。該態様は、本発明の概念やその実際の応用を最もよく説明するために選定されたものであって、それによって、当業者の他者が企図する特定の用途に適合させるべく種々の態様や種々の変形をなすことができるように、当業者の他者に本発明を理解せしめるためのものである。 The above description of specific embodiments of the present invention is provided for purposes of description and explanation. It is not intended to limit the invention to the precise form disclosed, nor is it intended to be exhaustive. Obviously, many modifications and variations will be apparent to practitioners skilled in this art. The embodiments have been selected to best illustrate the concepts of the invention and their practical application, and thus various embodiments and methods to adapt them to specific applications contemplated by others skilled in the art. It is intended to allow others skilled in the art to understand the present invention so that various modifications can be made.
 2010年12月08日出願の日本特許出願第2010-274101号公報は、その開示全体がここに参照文献として組み込まれるものである。
  本明細書に記述された全ての刊行物や特許出願、並びに技術標準は、それら個々の刊行物や特許出願、並びに技術標準が引用文献として特別に、そして個々に組み込むことが指定されている場合には、該引用文献と同じ限定範囲においてここに組み込まれるものである。本発明の範囲は下記特許請求の範囲及びその等価物に拠って決定されることを企図するものである。
Japanese Patent Application No. 2010-274101, filed on Dec. 08, 2010, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
All publications, patent applications, and technical standards mentioned in this specification are intended to be specifically and individually incorporated by reference as individual references, patent applications, and technical standards. Is incorporated herein to the same extent as the cited references. It is intended that the scope of the invention be determined by the following claims and their equivalents.

Claims (13)

  1.  少なくとも下記一般式(1)で表される化合物とバインダーポリマーとを含有する塗布液を支持体上に塗布してポリマー層を形成するポリマー層形成工程を有する樹脂フィルムの製造方法。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

     
     〔式中、R1a、R1b、R1c、R1d、及びR1eは、各々独立に、ヒドロキシ基を除く1価の置換基を表し、R1a~R1eの少なくとも1つはハメット則のσp値が0.3以上である置換基を表す。R1a~R1eで表される置換基は、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。R1g、R1h、R1i、R1j、R1k、R1m、R1n、及びR1pは、各々独立に、水素原子、又は1価の置換基を表し、該置換基は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。〕
    The manufacturing method of the resin layer which has a polymer layer formation process which apply | coats the coating liquid containing the compound and binder polymer which are represented by following General formula (1) at least on a support body, and forms a polymer layer.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001


    [Wherein, R 1a , R 1b , R 1c , R 1d , and R 1e each independently represent a monovalent substituent other than a hydroxy group, and at least one of R 1a to R 1e is a Hammett's rule It represents a substituent having a σp value of 0.3 or more. The substituents represented by R 1a to R 1e may be bonded to each other to form a ring. R 1g , R 1h , R 1i , R 1j , R 1k , R 1m , R 1n , and R 1p each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and the substituents are bonded to each other A ring may be formed. ]
  2.  前記一般式(1)のR1a、R1c、及びR1eが水素原子を表し、R1b及びR1dの少なくとも1つが、アルコキシカルボニル基、ニトロ基、シアノ基、フルオロアルキル基、スルホン酸又はそのアルカリ金属塩である請求項1に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法。 In the general formula (1), R 1a , R 1c and R 1e represent a hydrogen atom, and at least one of R 1b and R 1d is an alkoxycarbonyl group, a nitro group, a cyano group, a fluoroalkyl group, a sulfonic acid or The method for producing a resin film according to claim 1, which is an alkali metal salt.
  3.  前記一般式(1)で表される化合物の前記塗布液中における濃度が、塗布液の全質量に対して、3質量%以上9質量%以下であり、前記バインダーポリマーの前記塗布液中における濃度が、塗布液の全質量に対して、6質量%以上25質量%以下である請求項1に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法。 The concentration of the compound represented by the general formula (1) in the coating solution is 3% by mass to 9% by mass with respect to the total mass of the coating solution, and the concentration of the binder polymer in the coating solution. The method for producing a resin film according to claim 1, wherein the content is 6% by mass to 25% by mass with respect to the total mass of the coating solution.
  4.  更に、前記一般式(1)で表される化合物を溶媒中に分散して分散液を調製する工程を含み、
     前記ポリマー層形成工程は、前記分散液を用いて前記一般式(1)で表される化合物が分散状態で含有された前記塗布液を塗布する請求項1に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法。
    And a step of preparing a dispersion by dispersing the compound represented by the general formula (1) in a solvent,
    The said polymer layer formation process is a manufacturing method of the resin film of Claim 1 which apply | coats the said coating liquid in which the compound represented by the said General formula (1) contained in the dispersion state using the said dispersion liquid.
  5.  前記バインダーポリマーの少なくとも一種として、フッ素系ポリマー及びシリコーン系ポリマーから選ばれるポリマーを含有する請求項1に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法。 The method for producing a resin film according to claim 1, comprising a polymer selected from a fluorine-based polymer and a silicone-based polymer as at least one kind of the binder polymer.
  6.  前記塗布液は、更に、前記バインダーを架橋する架橋剤を含有する請求項1に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法。 The method for producing a resin film according to claim 1, wherein the coating liquid further contains a crosslinking agent that crosslinks the binder.
  7.  前記架橋剤が、カルボジイミド系架橋剤、及び/又はオキサゾリン系架橋剤である、請求項6に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法。  The method for producing a resin film according to claim 6, wherein the crosslinking agent is a carbodiimide crosslinking agent and / or an oxazoline crosslinking agent. *
  8.  前記架橋剤のポリマー層中における含有量が、前記バインダーポリマーに対して、0.5質量%以上40質量%以下である、請求項6に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法。 The method for producing a resin film according to claim 6, wherein the content of the crosslinking agent in the polymer layer is 0.5% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less with respect to the binder polymer.
  9.  前記塗布液は、更に溶媒を含み、前記溶媒の50質量%以上が水である請求項1~請求項6のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法。 The method for producing a resin film according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the coating liquid further contains a solvent, and 50% by mass or more of the solvent is water.
  10.  前記支持体が、ポリエステル基材である請求項1~請求項6のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法。 The method for producing a resin film according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the support is a polyester base material.
  11.  前記ポリマー層が形成された側とは反対側の支持体上に、少なくとも顔料とバインダーとを含有する塗布液を塗布して着色層を形成する着色層形成工程を更に有する、請求項1~請求項6のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法。 A colored layer forming step of forming a colored layer by applying a coating solution containing at least a pigment and a binder on a support opposite to the side on which the polymer layer is formed. Item 7. The method for producing a resin film according to any one of Items 6.
  12.  少なくとも前記バインダーポリマーを含有する保護層用塗布液を前記ポリマー層上に塗布して保護層を形成する保護層形成工程を有する請求項1~請求項6のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法。 The resin film according to any one of claims 1 to 6, further comprising a protective layer forming step of applying a protective layer coating solution containing at least the binder polymer on the polymer layer to form a protective layer. Production method.
  13.  太陽電池素子が封止材で封止された電池側基板の太陽光が入射する側と反対側に設けられる太陽電池用バックシートとして用いられる請求項1~請求項6のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂フィルムの製造方法。
     
    7. The solar cell backsheet according to claim 1, wherein the solar cell element is used as a solar cell backsheet provided on a side opposite to a side on which solar light is incident on a battery side substrate in which a solar cell element is sealed with a sealing material. Manufacturing method of resin film.
PCT/JP2011/076319 2010-12-08 2011-11-15 Resin film and manufacturing method therefor WO2012077469A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2010274101A JP2012121998A (en) 2010-12-08 2010-12-08 Resin film and production method of the same
JP2010-274101 2010-12-08

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2012077469A1 true WO2012077469A1 (en) 2012-06-14

Family

ID=46206967

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2011/076319 WO2012077469A1 (en) 2010-12-08 2011-11-15 Resin film and manufacturing method therefor

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2012121998A (en)
WO (1) WO2012077469A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6451452B2 (en) * 2015-03-30 2019-01-16 大日本印刷株式会社 Transfer sheet and decorative resin molded product using the same
WO2020017535A1 (en) * 2018-07-17 2020-01-23 富士フイルム株式会社 Composition for layering material used in medical lubricating member, layering material used in medical lubricating member, medical lubricating member, medical instrument, and production method for layering material used in medical lubricating member.

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4826978A (en) * 1987-12-29 1989-05-02 Milliken Research Corporation Reactive, non-yellowing triazine compounds useful as UV screening agents for polymers
JPH06211813A (en) * 1992-12-03 1994-08-02 Ciba Geigy Ag Bis- or tris-2'-hydroxyphenyltriazine ultraviolet absorber
JPH09106039A (en) * 1995-09-06 1997-04-22 Agfa Gevaert Ag Photographic recording material
JP2004352728A (en) * 1993-02-03 2004-12-16 Ciba Specialty Chem Holding Inc Electrodeposition coat/base coat/clear coat polishing material stabilized by s-triazine ultraviolet absorber
JP2007298648A (en) * 2006-04-28 2007-11-15 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Cellulose ester optical film, method for producing the same, and polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using the same
WO2009157449A1 (en) * 2008-06-23 2009-12-30 旭硝子株式会社 Backsheet for solar cell module and solar cell module
JP2010521434A (en) * 2007-03-15 2010-06-24 ビーエーエスエフ ソシエタス・ヨーロピア Thermosensitive coating composition based on resorcinyl triazine derivative
WO2011013723A1 (en) * 2009-07-29 2011-02-03 富士フイルム株式会社 New triazine derivative, ultraviolet absorber, and resin composition
WO2011089969A1 (en) * 2010-01-19 2011-07-28 富士フイルム株式会社 Polyester resin composition
WO2011089970A1 (en) * 2010-01-19 2011-07-28 富士フイルム株式会社 Coating composition and silicon resin composition
WO2011089968A1 (en) * 2010-01-19 2011-07-28 富士フイルム株式会社 Ultraviolet light absorbent composition

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4826978A (en) * 1987-12-29 1989-05-02 Milliken Research Corporation Reactive, non-yellowing triazine compounds useful as UV screening agents for polymers
JPH06211813A (en) * 1992-12-03 1994-08-02 Ciba Geigy Ag Bis- or tris-2'-hydroxyphenyltriazine ultraviolet absorber
JP2004352728A (en) * 1993-02-03 2004-12-16 Ciba Specialty Chem Holding Inc Electrodeposition coat/base coat/clear coat polishing material stabilized by s-triazine ultraviolet absorber
JPH09106039A (en) * 1995-09-06 1997-04-22 Agfa Gevaert Ag Photographic recording material
JP2007298648A (en) * 2006-04-28 2007-11-15 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Cellulose ester optical film, method for producing the same, and polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using the same
JP2010521434A (en) * 2007-03-15 2010-06-24 ビーエーエスエフ ソシエタス・ヨーロピア Thermosensitive coating composition based on resorcinyl triazine derivative
WO2009157449A1 (en) * 2008-06-23 2009-12-30 旭硝子株式会社 Backsheet for solar cell module and solar cell module
WO2011013723A1 (en) * 2009-07-29 2011-02-03 富士フイルム株式会社 New triazine derivative, ultraviolet absorber, and resin composition
WO2011089969A1 (en) * 2010-01-19 2011-07-28 富士フイルム株式会社 Polyester resin composition
WO2011089970A1 (en) * 2010-01-19 2011-07-28 富士フイルム株式会社 Coating composition and silicon resin composition
WO2011089968A1 (en) * 2010-01-19 2011-07-28 富士フイルム株式会社 Ultraviolet light absorbent composition

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2012121998A (en) 2012-06-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5734569B2 (en) SOLAR CELL BACK SHEET, MANUFACTURING METHOD THEREOF, AND SOLAR CELL MODULE
US9899553B2 (en) Adhesive sheet and protective sheet for solar cell
KR101625420B1 (en) Back sheet for solar cells and process for production thereof, and solar cell module
KR101622992B1 (en) Solar cell back sheet film and method for producing the same
KR101511201B1 (en) Solar cell backsheet, method of manufacturing same, and solar cell module
TW201208875A (en) Multi-layered sheet and method for preparing the same
TW201317317A (en) Back sheet for solar cell and solar cell module
KR101398504B1 (en) Back sheet for solar cell and process for production thereof, and solar cell module
TW201712088A (en) Rear surface protective sheet for solar cell and solar cell module
US20140007941A1 (en) Protective sheet for solar cell, method for manufacturing the same, back sheet member for solar cell, back sheet for solar cell and solar cell module
WO2012063945A1 (en) Back sheet for solar cells, and solar cell module
WO2012077469A1 (en) Resin film and manufacturing method therefor
WO2012077470A1 (en) Resin film and solar-cell module
JP6200131B2 (en) Polymer sheet, back surface protection sheet for solar cell, and solar cell module
TWI480310B (en) A polyester film for protective film on the back of solar cell
WO2012073804A1 (en) Protective film
KR20150118996A (en) Laminated sheet and back sheet for solar cell module
EP3075799A1 (en) Ir-reflective material
WO2013008945A1 (en) Polymer sheet for solar cells and solar cell module
JP2012222227A (en) Back sheet for solar cells, laminated body for the solar cells, solar cell module, and manufacturing methods of the back sheet, the laminated body, and the solar cell module
JP5606849B2 (en) Polymer sheet for solar cell backsheet and solar cell module
WO2016031340A1 (en) Solar cell rear surface protection sheet and solar cell module
JP5611136B2 (en) SOLAR CELL BACK SHEET, MANUFACTURING METHOD THEREOF, AND SOLAR CELL MODULE
JP2012231029A (en) Protective sheet for solar cell and method for producing the same, and solar cell module
CN209963070U (en) Solar backboard and solar cell module comprising same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 11846268

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 11846268

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1